microsoft
/
WSL2-Linux-Kernel
зеркало из https://github.com/microsoft/WSL2-Linux-Kernel.git
1
0
Форкнуть 0
Код Задачи Пакеты Проекты Релизы Вики Активность
WSL2-Linux-Kernel/net/dsa/dsa_priv.h

582 строки
20 KiB
C
Исходник Обычный вид История

treewide: Replace GPLv2 boilerplate/reference with SPDX - rule 152 Based on 1 normalized pattern(s): this program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the gnu general public license as published by the free software foundation either version 2 of the license or at your option any later version extracted by the scancode license scanner the SPDX license identifier GPL-2.0-or-later has been chosen to replace the boilerplate/reference in 3029 file(s). Signed-off-by: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> Reviewed-by: Allison Randal <allison@lohutok.net> Cc: linux-spdx@vger.kernel.org Link: https://lkml.kernel.org/r/20190527070032.746973796@linutronix.de Signed-off-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
2019-05-27 09:55:01 +03:00
/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-or-later */
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
/*
* net/dsa/dsa_priv.h - Hardware switch handling
dsa: add switch chip cascading support The initial version of the DSA driver only supported a single switch chip per network interface, while DSA-capable switch chips can be interconnected to form a tree of switch chips. This patch adds support for multiple switch chips on a network interface. An example topology for a 16-port device with an embedded CPU is as follows: +-----+ +--------+ +--------+ | |eth0 10| switch |9 10| switch | | CPU +----------+ +-------+ | | | | chip 0 | | chip 1 | +-----+ +---++---+ +---++---+ || || || || ||1000baseT ||1000baseT ||ports 1-8 ||ports 9-16 This requires a couple of interdependent changes in the DSA layer: - The dsa platform driver data needs to be extended: there is still only one netdevice per DSA driver instance (eth0 in the example above), but each of the switch chips in the tree needs its own mii_bus device pointer, MII management bus address, and port name array. (include/net/dsa.h) The existing in-tree dsa users need some small changes to deal with this. (arch/arm) - The DSA and Ethertype DSA tagging modules need to be extended to use the DSA device ID field on receive and demultiplex the packet accordingly, and fill in the DSA device ID field on transmit according to which switch chip the packet is heading to. (net/dsa/tag_{dsa,edsa}.c) - The concept of "CPU port", which is the switch chip port that the CPU is connected to (port 10 on switch chip 0 in the example), needs to be extended with the concept of "upstream port", which is the port on the switch chip that will bring us one hop closer to the CPU (port 10 for both switch chips in the example above). - The dsa platform data needs to specify which ports on which switch chips are links to other switch chips, so that we can enable DSA tagging mode on them. (For inter-switch links, we always use non-EtherType DSA tagging, since it has lower overhead. The CPU link uses dsa or edsa tagging depending on what the 'root' switch chip supports.) This is done by specifying "dsa" for the given port in the port array. - The dsa platform data needs to be extended with information on via which port to reach any given switch chip from any given switch chip. This info is specified via the per-switch chip data struct ->rtable[] array, which gives the nexthop ports for each of the other switches in the tree. For the example topology above, the dsa platform data would look something like this: static struct dsa_chip_data sw[2] = { { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 1, .port_names[0] = "p1", .port_names[1] = "p2", .port_names[2] = "p3", .port_names[3] = "p4", .port_names[4] = "p5", .port_names[5] = "p6", .port_names[6] = "p7", .port_names[7] = "p8", .port_names[9] = "dsa", .port_names[10] = "cpu", .rtable = (s8 []){ -1, 9, }, }, { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 2, .port_names[0] = "p9", .port_names[1] = "p10", .port_names[2] = "p11", .port_names[3] = "p12", .port_names[4] = "p13", .port_names[5] = "p14", .port_names[6] = "p15", .port_names[7] = "p16", .port_names[10] = "dsa", .rtable = (s8 []){ 10, -1, }, }, }, static struct dsa_platform_data pd = { .netdev = &foo, .nr_switches = 2, .sw = sw, }; Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Gary Thomas <gary@mlbassoc.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-03-20 12:52:09 +03:00
* Copyright (c) 2008-2009 Marvell Semiconductor
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
*/
#ifndef __DSA_PRIV_H
#define __DSA_PRIV_H
net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs Currently the bridge untags VLANs present in its VLAN groups in __allowed_ingress() only when VLAN filtering is enabled. But when a skb is seen on the RX path as tagged with the bridge's pvid, and that bridge has vlan_filtering=0, and there isn't any 8021q upper with that VLAN either, then we have a problem. The bridge will not untag it (since it is supposed to remain VLAN-unaware), and pvid-tagged communication will be broken. There are 2 situations where we can end up like that: 1. When installing a pvid in egress-tagged mode, like this: ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set swp0 master br0 bridge vlan del dev swp0 vid 1 bridge vlan add dev swp0 vid 1 pvid This happens because DSA configures the VLAN membership of the CPU port using the same flags as swp0 (in this case "pvid and not untagged"), in an attempt to copy the frame as-is from ingress to the CPU. However, in this case, the packet may arrive untagged on ingress, it will be pvid-tagged by the ingress port, and will be sent as egress-tagged towards the CPU. Otherwise stated, the CPU will see a VLAN tag where there was none to speak of on ingress. When vlan_filtering is 1, this is not a problem, as stated in the first paragraph, because __allowed_ingress() will pop it. But currently, when vlan_filtering is 0 and we have such a VLAN configuration, we need an 8021q upper (br0.1) to be able to ping over that VLAN, which is not symmetrical with the vlan_filtering=1 case, and therefore, confusing for users. Basically what DSA attempts to do is simply an approximation: try to copy the skb with (or without) the same VLAN all the way up to the CPU. But DSA drivers treat CPU port VLAN membership in various ways (which is a good segue into situation 2). And some of those drivers simply tell the CPU port to copy the frame unmodified, which is the golden standard when it comes to VLAN processing (therefore, any driver which can configure the hardware to do that, should do that, and discard the VLAN flags requested by DSA on the CPU port). 2. Some DSA drivers always configure the CPU port as egress-tagged, in an attempt to recover the classified VLAN from the skb. These drivers cannot work at all with untagged traffic when bridged in vlan_filtering=0 mode. And they can't go for the easy "just keep the pvid as egress-untagged towards the CPU" route, because each front port can have its own pvid, and that might require conflicting VLAN membership settings on the CPU port (swp1 is pvid for VID 1 and egress-tagged for VID 2; swp2 is egress-taggeed for VID 1 and pvid for VID 2; with this simplistic approach, the CPU port, which is really a separate hardware entity and has its own VLAN membership settings, would end up being egress-untagged in both VID 1 and VID 2, therefore losing the VLAN tags of ingress traffic). So the only thing we can do is to create a helper function for resolving the problematic case (that is, a function which untags the bridge pvid when that is in vlan_filtering=0 mode), which taggers in need should call. It isn't called from the generic DSA receive path because there are drivers that fall neither in the first nor second category. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-09-24 00:40:37 +03:00
#include <linux/if_bridge.h>
net: Don't include filter.h from net/sock.h sock.h is pretty heavily used (5k objects rebuilt on x86 after it's touched). We can drop the include of filter.h from it and add a forward declaration of struct sk_filter instead. This decreases the number of rebuilt objects when bpf.h is touched from ~5k to ~1k. There's a lot of missing includes this was masking. Primarily in networking tho, this time. Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org> Signed-off-by: Alexei Starovoitov <ast@kernel.org> Acked-by: Marc Kleine-Budde <mkl@pengutronix.de> Acked-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Acked-by: Nikolay Aleksandrov <nikolay@nvidia.com> Acked-by: Stefano Garzarella <sgarzare@redhat.com> Link: https://lore.kernel.org/bpf/20211229004913.513372-1-kuba@kernel.org
2021-12-29 03:49:13 +03:00
#include <linux/if_vlan.h>
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
#include <linux/phy.h>
dsa: Split ops up, and avoid assigning tag_protocol and receive separately This change addresses several issues. First, it was possible to set tag_protocol without setting the ops pointer. To correct that I have reordered things so that rcv is now populated before we set tag_protocol. Second, it didn't make much sense to keep setting the device ops each time a new slave was registered. So by moving the receive portion out into root switch initialization that issue should be addressed. Third, I wanted to avoid sending tags if the rcv pointer was not registered so I changed the tag check to verify if the rcv function pointer is set on the root tree. If it is then we start sending DSA tagged frames. Finally I split the device ops pointer in the structures into two spots. I placed the rcv function pointer in the root switch since this makes it easiest to access from there, and I placed the xmit function pointer in the slave for the same reason. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2014-09-15 21:00:19 +04:00
#include <linux/netdevice.h>
net: dsa: Add netconsole support Add support for using DSA slave network devices with netconsole, which requires us to allocate and free custom netpoll instances and invoke the parent network device poll controller callback. In order for netconsole to work, we need to construct the DSA tag, but not queue the skb for transmission on the master network device xmit function. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2015-07-31 21:42:57 +03:00
#include <linux/netpoll.h>
net: dsa: include dsa.h only once The public include/net/dsa.h file is meant for DSA drivers, while all DSA core files share a common private header net/dsa/dsa_priv.h file. Ensure that dsa_priv.h is the only DSA core file to include net/dsa.h, and add a new line to separate absolute and relative headers at the same time. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-17 22:46:03 +03:00
#include <net/dsa.h>
net: dsa: add GRO support via gro_cells gro_cells lib is used by different encapsulating netdevices, such as geneve, macsec, vxlan etc. to speed up decapsulated traffic processing. CPU tag is a sort of "encapsulation", and we can use the same mechs to greatly improve overall DSA performance. skbs are passed to the GRO layer after removing CPU tags, so we don't need any new packet offload types as it was firstly proposed by me in the first GRO-over-DSA variant [1]. The size of struct gro_cells is sizeof(void *), so hot struct dsa_slave_priv becomes only 4/8 bytes bigger, and all critical fields remain in one 32-byte cacheline. The other positive side effect is that drivers for network devices that can be shipped as CPU ports of DSA-driven switches can now use napi_gro_frags() to pass skbs to kernel. Packets built that way are completely non-linear and are likely being dropped without GRO. This was tested on to-be-mainlined-soon Ethernet driver that uses napi_gro_frags(), and the overall performance was on par with the variant from [1], sometimes even better due to minimal overhead. net.core.gro_normal_batch tuning may help to push it to the limit on particular setups and platforms. iperf3 IPoE VLAN NAT TCP forwarding (port1.218 -> port0) setup on 1.2 GHz MIPS board: 5.7-rc2 baseline: [ID] Interval Transfer Bitrate Retr [ 5] 0.00-120.01 sec 9.00 GBytes 644 Mbits/sec 413 sender [ 5] 0.00-120.00 sec 8.99 GBytes 644 Mbits/sec receiver Iface RX packets TX packets eth0 7097731 7097702 port0 426050 6671829 port1 6671681 425862 port1.218 6671677 425851 With this patch: [ID] Interval Transfer Bitrate Retr [ 5] 0.00-120.01 sec 12.2 GBytes 870 Mbits/sec 122 sender [ 5] 0.00-120.00 sec 12.2 GBytes 870 Mbits/sec receiver Iface RX packets TX packets eth0 9474792 9474777 port0 455200 353288 port1 9019592 455035 port1.218 353144 455024 v2: - Add some performance examples in the commit message; - No functional changes. [1] https://lore.kernel.org/netdev/20191230143028.27313-1-alobakin@dlink.ru/ Signed-off-by: Alexander Lobakin <bloodyreaper@yandex.ru> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-04-21 16:41:08 +03:00
#include <net/gro_cells.h>
dsa: Split ops up, and avoid assigning tag_protocol and receive separately This change addresses several issues. First, it was possible to set tag_protocol without setting the ops pointer. To correct that I have reordered things so that rcv is now populated before we set tag_protocol. Second, it didn't make much sense to keep setting the device ops each time a new slave was registered. So by moving the receive portion out into root switch initialization that issue should be addressed. Third, I wanted to avoid sending tags if the rcv pointer was not registered so I changed the tag check to verify if the rcv function pointer is set on the root tree. If it is then we start sending DSA tagged frames. Finally I split the device ops pointer in the structures into two spots. I placed the rcv function pointer in the root switch since this makes it easiest to access from there, and I placed the xmit function pointer in the slave for the same reason. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2014-09-15 21:00:19 +04:00
net: dsa: add support for bridge TX forwarding offload For a DSA switch, to offload the forwarding process of a bridge device means to send the packets coming from the software bridge as data plane packets. This is contrary to everything that DSA has done so far, because the current taggers only know to send control packets (ones that target a specific destination port), whereas data plane packets are supposed to be forwarded according to the FDB lookup, much like packets ingressing on any regular ingress port. If the FDB lookup process returns multiple destination ports (flooding, multicast), then replication is also handled by the switch hardware - the bridge only sends a single packet and avoids the skb_clone(). DSA keeps for each bridge port a zero-based index (the number of the bridge). Multiple ports performing TX forwarding offload to the same bridge have the same dp->bridge_num value, and ports not offloading the TX data plane of a bridge have dp->bridge_num = -1. The tagger can check if the packet that is being transmitted on has skb->offload_fwd_mark = true or not. If it does, it can be sure that the packet belongs to the data plane of a bridge, further information about which can be obtained based on dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num. It can then compose a DSA tag for injecting a data plane packet into that bridge number. For the switch driver side, we offer two new dsa_switch_ops methods, called .port_bridge_fwd_offload_{add,del}, which are modeled after .port_bridge_{join,leave}. These methods are provided in case the driver needs to configure the hardware to treat packets coming from that bridge software interface as data plane packets. The switchdev <-> bridge interaction happens during the netdev_master_upper_dev_link() call, so to switch drivers, the effect is that the .port_bridge_fwd_offload_add() method is called immediately after .port_bridge_join(). If the bridge number exceeds the number of bridges for which the switch driver can offload the TX data plane (and this includes the case where the driver can offload none), DSA falls back to simply returning tx_fwd_offload = false in the switchdev_bridge_port_offload() call. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-22 18:55:40 +03:00
#define DSA_MAX_NUM_OFFLOADING_BRIDGES BITS_PER_LONG
net: dsa: move notifier info to private header The DSA notifier events and info structure definitions are not meant for DSA drivers and users, but only used internally by the DSA core files. Move them from the public net/dsa.h file to the private dsa_priv.h file. Also use this opportunity to turn the events into an anonymous enum, because we don't care about the values, and this will prevent future conflicts when adding (and sorting) new events. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:51 +03:00
enum {
net: dsa: add notifier for ageing time This patch keeps the port-wide ageing time handling code in dsa_port_ageing_time, pushes the requested ageing time value in a new switch fabric notification, and moves the switch-wide ageing time handling code in dsa_switch_ageing_time. This has the effect that now not only the switch that the target port belongs to can be programmed, but all switches composing the switch fabric. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:52 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_AGEING_TIME,
net: dsa: move notifier info to private header The DSA notifier events and info structure definitions are not meant for DSA drivers and users, but only used internally by the DSA core files. Move them from the public net/dsa.h file to the private dsa_priv.h file. Also use this opportunity to turn the events into an anonymous enum, because we don't care about the values, and this will prevent future conflicts when adding (and sorting) new events. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:51 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_BRIDGE_JOIN,
DSA_NOTIFIER_BRIDGE_LEAVE,
net: dsa: add FDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an FDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:53 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_DEL,
net: dsa: introduce a separate cross-chip notifier type for host FDBs DSA treats some bridge FDB entries by trapping them to the CPU port. Currently, the only class of such entries are FDB addresses learnt by the software bridge on a foreign interface. However there are many more to be added: - FDB entries with the is_local flag (for termination) added by the bridge on the user ports (typically containing the MAC address of the bridge port) - FDB entries pointing towards the bridge net device (for termination). Typically these contain the MAC address of the bridge net device. - Static FDB entries installed on a foreign interface that is in the same bridge with a DSA user port. The reason why a separate cross-chip notifier for host FDBs is justified compared to normal FDBs is the same as in the case of host MDBs: the cross-chip notifier matching function in switch.c should avoid installing these entries on routing ports that route towards the targeted switch, but not towards the CPU. This is required in order to have proper support for H-like multi-chip topologies. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-06-29 17:06:51 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_FDB_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_FDB_DEL,
net: dsa: support FDB events on offloaded LAG interfaces This change introduces support for installing static FDB entries towards a bridge port that is a LAG of multiple DSA switch ports, as well as support for filtering towards the CPU local FDB entries emitted for LAG interfaces that are bridge ports. Conceptually, host addresses on LAG ports are identical to what we do for plain bridge ports. Whereas FDB entries _towards_ a LAG can't simply be replicated towards all member ports like we do for multicast, or VLAN. Instead we need new driver API. Hardware usually considers a LAG to be a "logical port", and sets the entire LAG as the forwarding destination. The physical egress port selection within the LAG is made by hashing policy, as usual. To represent the logical port corresponding to the LAG, we pass by value a copy of the dsa_lag structure to all switches in the tree that have at least one port in that LAG. To illustrate why a refcounted list of FDB entries is needed in struct dsa_lag, it is enough to say that: - a LAG may be a bridge port and may therefore receive FDB events even while it isn't yet offloaded by any DSA interface - DSA interfaces may be removed from a LAG while that is a bridge port; we don't want FDB entries lingering around, but we don't want to remove entries that are still in use, either For all the cases below to work, the idea is to always keep an FDB entry on a LAG with a reference count equal to the DSA member ports. So: - if a port joins a LAG, it requests the bridge to replay the FDB, and the FDB entries get created, or their refcount gets bumped by one - if a port leaves a LAG, the FDB replay deletes or decrements refcount by one - if an FDB is installed towards a LAG with ports already present, that entry is created (if it doesn't exist) and its refcount is bumped by the amount of ports already present in the LAG echo "Adding FDB entry to bond with existing ports" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond, then removing ports one by one" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp1 nomaster ip link set swp2 nomaster ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:53 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_FDB_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_FDB_DEL,
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_CHANGE,
DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_JOIN,
DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_LEAVE,
net: dsa: add MDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an MDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:54 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_DEL,
net: dsa: introduce a separate cross-chip notifier type for host MDBs Commit abd49535c380 ("net: dsa: execute dsa_switch_mdb_add only for routing port in cross-chip topologies") does a surprisingly good job even for the SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_HOST_MDB use case, where DSA simply translates a switchdev object received on dp into a cross-chip notifier for dp->cpu_dp. To visualize how that works, imagine the daisy chain topology below and consider a SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_HOST_MDB object emitted on sw2p0. How does the cross-chip notifier know to match on all the right ports (sw0p4, the dedicated CPU port, sw1p4, an upstream DSA link, and sw2p4, another upstream DSA link)? | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw0p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ x ] | +---------+ | sw1p0 sw1p1 sw1p2 sw1p3 sw1p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ x ] | +---------+ | sw2p0 sw2p1 sw2p2 sw2p3 sw2p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ x ] The answer is simple: the dedicated CPU port of sw2p0 is sw0p4, and dsa_routing_port returns the upstream port for all switches. That is fine, but there are other topologies where this does not work as well. There are trees with "H" topologies in the wild, where there are 2 or more switches with DSA links between them, but every switch has its dedicated CPU port. For these topologies, it seems stupid for the neighbor switches to install an MDB entry on the routing port, since these multicast addresses are fundamentally different than the usual ones we support (and that is the justification for this patch, to introduce the concept of a termination plane multicast MAC address, as opposed to a forwarding plane multicast MAC address). For example, when a SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_HOST_MDB would get added to sw0p0, without this patch, it would get treated as a regular port MDB on sw0p2 and it would match on the ports below (including the sw1p3 routing port). | | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw1p3 sw1p2 sw1p1 sw1p0 [ user ] [ user ] [ cpu ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] [ user ] [ user ] [ ] [ ] [ x ] [ ] ---- [ x ] [ ] [ ] [ ] With the patch, the host MDB notifier on sw0p0 matches only on the local switch, which is what we want for a termination plane address. | | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw1p3 sw1p2 sw1p1 sw1p0 [ user ] [ user ] [ cpu ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] [ user ] [ user ] [ ] [ ] [ x ] [ ] ---- [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] Name this new matching function "dsa_switch_host_address_match" since we will be reusing it soon for host FDB entries as well. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-06-29 17:06:49 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_MDB_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_MDB_DEL,
net: dsa: add VLAN notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an VLAN entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:55 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_DEL,
net: dsa: add explicit support for host bridge VLANs Currently, DSA programs VLANs on shared (DSA and CPU) ports each time it does so on user ports. This is good for basic functionality but has several limitations: - the VLAN group which must reach the CPU may be radically different from the VLAN group that must be autonomously forwarded by the switch. In other words, the admin may want to isolate noisy stations and avoid traffic from them going to the control processor of the switch, where it would just waste useless cycles. The bridge already supports independent control of VLAN groups on bridge ports and on the bridge itself, and when VLAN-aware, it will drop packets in software anyway if their VID isn't added as a 'self' entry towards the bridge device. - Replaying host FDB entries may depend, for some drivers like mv88e6xxx, on replaying the host VLANs as well. The 2 VLAN groups are approximately the same in most regular cases, but there are corner cases when timing matters, and DSA's approximation of replicating VLANs on shared ports simply does not work. - If a user makes the bridge (implicitly the CPU port) join a VLAN by accident, there is no way for the CPU port to isolate itself from that noisy VLAN except by rebooting the system. This is because for each VLAN added on a user port, DSA will add it on shared ports too, but for each VLAN deletion on a user port, it will remain installed on shared ports, since DSA has no good indication of whether the VLAN is still in use or not. Now that the bridge driver emits well-balanced SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_PORT_VLAN addition and removal events, DSA has a simple and straightforward task of separating the bridge port VLANs (these have an orig_dev which is a DSA slave interface, or a LAG interface) from the host VLANs (these have an orig_dev which is a bridge interface), and to keep a simple reference count of each VID on each shared port. Forwarding VLANs must be installed on the bridge ports and on all DSA ports interconnecting them. We don't have a good view of the exact topology, so we simply install forwarding VLANs on all DSA ports, which is what has been done until now. Host VLANs must be installed primarily on the dedicated CPU port of each bridge port. More subtly, they must also be installed on upstream-facing and downstream-facing DSA ports that are connecting the bridge ports and the CPU. This ensures that the mv88e6xxx's problem (VID of host FDB entry may be absent from VTU) is still addressed even if that switch is in a cross-chip setup, and it has no local CPU port. Therefore: - user ports contain only bridge port (forwarding) VLANs, and no refcounting is necessary - DSA ports contain both forwarding and host VLANs. Refcounting is necessary among these 2 types. - CPU ports contain only host VLANs. Refcounting is also necessary. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-15 20:02:17 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_VLAN_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_HOST_VLAN_DEL,
net: dsa: configure the MTU for switch ports It is useful be able to configure port policers on a switch to accept frames of various sizes: - Increase the MTU for better throughput from the default of 1500 if it is known that there is no 10/100 Mbps device in the network. - Decrease the MTU to limit the latency of high-priority frames under congestion, or work around various network segments that add extra headers to packets which can't be fragmented. For DSA slave ports, this is mostly a pass-through callback, called through the regular ndo ops and at probe time (to ensure consistency across all supported switches). The CPU port is called with an MTU equal to the largest configured MTU of the slave ports. The assumption is that the user might want to sustain a bidirectional conversation with a partner over any switch port. The DSA master is configured the same as the CPU port, plus the tagger overhead. Since the MTU is by definition L2 payload (sans Ethernet header), it is up to each individual driver to figure out if it needs to do anything special for its frame tags on the CPU port (it shouldn't except in special cases). So the MTU does not contain the tagger overhead on the CPU port. However the MTU of the DSA master, minus the tagger overhead, is used as a proxy for the MTU of the CPU port, which does not have a net device. This is to avoid uselessly calling the .change_mtu function on the CPU port when nothing should change. So it is safe to assume that the DSA master and the CPU port MTUs are apart by exactly the tagger's overhead in bytes. Some changes were made around dsa_master_set_mtu(), function which was now removed, for 2 reasons: - dev_set_mtu() already calls dev_validate_mtu(), so it's redundant to do the same thing in DSA - __dev_set_mtu() returns 0 if ops->ndo_change_mtu is an absent method That is to say, there's no need for this function in DSA, we can safely call dev_set_mtu() directly, take the rtnl lock when necessary, and just propagate whatever errors get reported (since the user probably wants to be informed). Some inspiration (mainly in the MTU DSA notifier) was taken from a vaguely similar patch from Murali and Florian, who are credited as co-developers down below. Co-developed-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Co-developed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:42 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_MTU,
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_PROTO,
net: dsa: introduce tagger-owned storage for private and shared data Ansuel is working on register access over Ethernet for the qca8k switch family. This requires the qca8k tagging protocol driver to receive frames which aren't intended for the network stack, but instead for the qca8k switch driver itself. The dp->priv is currently the prevailing method for passing data back and forth between the tagging protocol driver and the switch driver. However, this method is riddled with caveats. The DSA design allows in principle for any switch driver to return any protocol it desires in ->get_tag_protocol(). The dsa_loop driver can be modified to do just that. But in the current design, the memory behind dp->priv has to be allocated by the switch driver, so if the tagging protocol is paired to an unexpected switch driver, we may end up in NULL pointer dereferences inside the kernel, or worse (a switch driver may allocate dp->priv according to the expectations of a different tagger). The latter possibility is even more plausible considering that DSA switches can dynamically change tagging protocols in certain cases (dsa <-> edsa, ocelot <-> ocelot-8021q), and the current design lends itself to mistakes that are all too easy to make. This patch proposes that the tagging protocol driver should manage its own memory, instead of relying on the switch driver to do so. After analyzing the different in-tree needs, it can be observed that the required tagger storage is per switch, therefore a ds->tagger_data pointer is introduced. In principle, per-port storage could also be introduced, although there is no need for it at the moment. Future changes will replace the current usage of dp->priv with ds->tagger_data. We define a "binding" event between the DSA switch tree and the tagging protocol. During this binding event, the tagging protocol's ->connect() method is called first, and this may allocate some memory for each switch of the tree. Then a cross-chip notifier is emitted for the switches within that tree, and they are given the opportunity to fix up the tagger's memory (for example, they might set up some function pointers that represent virtual methods for consuming packets). Because the memory is owned by the tagger, there exists a ->disconnect() method for the tagger (which is the place to free the resources), but there doesn't exist a ->disconnect() method for the switch driver. This is part of the design. The switch driver should make minimal use of the public part of the tagger data, and only after type-checking it using the supplied "proto" argument. In the code there are in fact two binding events, one is the initial event in dsa_switch_setup_tag_protocol(). At this stage, the cross chip notifier chains aren't initialized, so we call each switch's connect() method by hand. Then there is dsa_tree_bind_tag_proto() during dsa_tree_change_tag_proto(), and here we have an old protocol and a new one. We first connect to the new one before disconnecting from the old one, to simplify error handling a bit and to ensure we remain in a valid state at all times. Co-developed-by: Ansuel Smith <ansuelsmth@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Ansuel Smith <ansuelsmth@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-12-10 02:34:37 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_PROTO_CONNECT,
net: dsa: make tagging protocols connect to individual switches from a tree On the NXP Bluebox 3 board which uses a multi-switch setup with sja1105, the mechanism through which the tagger connects to the switch tree is broken, due to improper DSA code design. At the time when tag_ops->connect() is called in dsa_port_parse_cpu(), DSA hasn't finished "touching" all the ports, so it doesn't know how large the tree is and how many ports it has. It has just seen the first CPU port by this time. As a result, this function will call the tagger's ->connect method too early, and the tagger will connect only to the first switch from the tree. This could be perhaps addressed a bit more simply by just moving the tag_ops->connect(dst) call a bit later (for example in dsa_tree_setup), but there is already a design inconsistency at present: on the switch side, the notification is on a per-switch basis, but on the tagger side, it is on a per-tree basis. Furthermore, the persistent storage itself is per switch (ds->tagger_data). And the tagger connect and disconnect procedures (at least the ones that exist currently) could see a fair bit of simplification if they didn't have to iterate through the switches of a tree. To fix the issue, this change transforms tag_ops->connect(dst) into tag_ops->connect(ds) and moves it somewhere where we already iterate over all switches of a tree. That is in dsa_switch_setup_tag_protocol(), which is a good placement because we already have there the connection call to the switch side of things. As for the dsa_tree_bind_tag_proto() method (called from the code path that changes the tag protocol), things are a bit more complicated because we receive the tree as argument, yet when we unwind on errors, it would be nice to not call tag_ops->disconnect(ds) where we didn't previously call tag_ops->connect(ds). We didn't have this problem before because the tag_ops connection operations passed the entire dst before, and this is more fine grained now. To solve the error rewind case using the new API, we have to create yet one more cross-chip notifier for disconnection, and stay connected with the old tag protocol to all the switches in the tree until we've succeeded to connect with the new one as well. So if something fails half way, the whole tree is still connected to the old tagger. But there may still be leaks if the tagger fails to connect to the 2nd out of 3 switches in a tree: somebody needs to tell the tagger to disconnect from the first switch. Nothing comes for free, and this was previously handled privately by the tagging protocol driver before, but now we need to emit a disconnect cross-chip notifier for that, because DSA has to take care of the unwind path. We assume that the tagging protocol has connected to a switch if it has set ds->tagger_data to something, otherwise we avoid calling its disconnection method in the error rewind path. The rest of the changes are in the tagging protocol drivers, and have to do with the replacement of dst with ds. The iteration is removed and the error unwind path is simplified, as mentioned above. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-12-14 04:45:36 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_PROTO_DISCONNECT,
net: dsa: tag_8021q: add proper cross-chip notifier support The big problem which mandates cross-chip notifiers for tag_8021q is this: | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw0p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] | +---------+ | sw1p0 sw1p1 sw1p2 sw1p3 sw1p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] | +---------+ | sw2p0 sw2p1 sw2p2 sw2p3 sw2p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] When the user runs: ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set sw0p0 master br0 ip link set sw2p0 master br0 It doesn't work. This is because dsa_8021q_crosschip_bridge_join() assumes that "ds" and "other_ds" are at most 1 hop away from each other, so it is sufficient to add the RX VLAN of {ds, port} into {other_ds, other_port} and vice versa and presto, the cross-chip link works. When there is another switch in the middle, such as in this case switch 1 with its DSA links sw1p3 and sw1p4, somebody needs to tell it about these VLANs too. Which is exactly why the problem is quadratic: when a port joins a bridge, for each port in the tree that's already in that same bridge we notify a tag_8021q VLAN addition of that port's RX VLAN to the entire tree. It is a very complicated web of VLANs. It must be mentioned that currently we install tag_8021q VLANs on too many ports (DSA links - to be precise, on all of them). For example, when sw2p0 joins br0, and assuming sw1p0 was part of br0 too, we add the RX VLAN of sw2p0 on the DSA links of switch 0 too, even though there isn't any port of switch 0 that is a member of br0 (at least yet). In theory we could notify only the switches which sit in between the port joining the bridge and the port reacting to that bridge_join event. But in practice that is impossible, because of the way 'link' properties are described in the device tree. The DSA bindings require DT writers to list out not only the real/physical DSA links, but in fact the entire routing table, like for example switch 0 above will have: sw0p3: port@3 { link = <&sw1p4 &sw2p4>; }; This was done because: /* TODO: ideally DSA ports would have a single dp->link_dp member, * and no dst->rtable nor this struct dsa_link would be needed, * but this would require some more complex tree walking, * so keep it stupid at the moment and list them all. */ but it is a perfect example of a situation where too much information is actively detrimential, because we are now in the position where we cannot distinguish a real DSA link from one that is put there to avoid the 'complex tree walking'. And because DT is ABI, there is not much we can change. And because we do not know which DSA links are real and which ones aren't, we can't really know if DSA switch A is in the data path between switches B and C, in the general case. So this is why tag_8021q RX VLANs are added on all DSA links, and probably why it will never change. On the other hand, at least the number of additions/deletions is well balanced, and this means that once we implement reference counting at the cross-chip notifier level a la fdb/mdb, there is absolutely zero need for a struct dsa_8021q_crosschip_link, it's all self-managing. In fact, with the tag_8021q notifiers emitted from the bridge join notifiers, it becomes so generic that sja1105 does not need to do anything anymore, we can just delete its implementation of the .crosschip_bridge_{join,leave} methods. Among other things we can simply delete is the home-grown implementation of sja1105_notify_crosschip_switches(). The reason why that is wrong is because it is not quadratic - it only covers remote switches to which we have a cross-chip bridging link and that does not cover in-between switches. This deletion is part of the same patch because sja1105 used to poke deep inside the guts of the tag_8021q context in order to do that. Because the cross-chip links went away, so needs the sja1105 code. Last but not least, dsa_8021q_setup_port() is simplified (and also renamed). Because our TAG_8021Q_VLAN_ADD notifier is designed to react on the CPU port too, the four dsa_8021q_vid_apply() calls: - 1 for RX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's RX VLAN on the CPU port - 1 for TX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's TX VLAN on the CPU port now get squashed into only 2 notifier calls via dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_add. And because the notifiers to add and to delete a tag_8021q VLAN are distinct, now we finally break up the port setup and teardown into separate functions instead of relying on a "bool enabled" flag which tells us what to do. Arguably it should have been this way from the get go. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:52 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_8021Q_VLAN_ADD,
DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_8021Q_VLAN_DEL,
net: dsa: provide switch operations for tracking the master state Certain drivers may need to send management traffic to the switch for things like register access, FDB dump, etc, to accelerate what their slow bus (SPI, I2C, MDIO) can already do. Ethernet is faster (especially in bulk transactions) but is also more unreliable, since the user may decide to bring the DSA master down (or not bring it up), therefore severing the link between the host and the attached switch. Drivers needing Ethernet-based register access already should have fallback logic to the slow bus if the Ethernet method fails, but that fallback may be based on a timeout, and the I/O to the switch may slow down to a halt if the master is down, because every Ethernet packet will have to time out. The driver also doesn't have the option to turn off Ethernet-based I/O momentarily, because it wouldn't know when to turn it back on. Which is where this change comes in. By tracking NETDEV_CHANGE, NETDEV_UP and NETDEV_GOING_DOWN events on the DSA master, we should know the exact interval of time during which this interface is reliably available for traffic. Provide this information to switches so they can use it as they wish. An helper is added dsa_port_master_is_operational() to check if a master port is operational. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Ansuel Smith <ansuelsmth@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-02 03:03:20 +03:00
DSA_NOTIFIER_MASTER_STATE_CHANGE,
net: dsa: move notifier info to private header The DSA notifier events and info structure definitions are not meant for DSA drivers and users, but only used internally by the DSA core files. Move them from the public net/dsa.h file to the private dsa_priv.h file. Also use this opportunity to turn the events into an anonymous enum, because we don't care about the values, and this will prevent future conflicts when adding (and sorting) new events. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:51 +03:00
};
net: dsa: add notifier for ageing time This patch keeps the port-wide ageing time handling code in dsa_port_ageing_time, pushes the requested ageing time value in a new switch fabric notification, and moves the switch-wide ageing time handling code in dsa_switch_ageing_time. This has the effect that now not only the switch that the target port belongs to can be programmed, but all switches composing the switch fabric. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:52 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_AGEING_TIME */
struct dsa_notifier_ageing_time_info {
unsigned int ageing_time;
};
net: dsa: move notifier info to private header The DSA notifier events and info structure definitions are not meant for DSA drivers and users, but only used internally by the DSA core files. Move them from the public net/dsa.h file to the private dsa_priv.h file. Also use this opportunity to turn the events into an anonymous enum, because we don't care about the values, and this will prevent future conflicts when adding (and sorting) new events. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:51 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_BRIDGE_* */
struct dsa_notifier_bridge_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: keep the bridge_dev and bridge_num as part of the same structure The main desire behind this is to provide coherent bridge information to the fast path without locking. For example, right now we set dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num from separate code paths, it is theoretically possible for a packet transmission to read these two port properties consecutively and find a bridge number which does not correspond with the bridge device. Another desire is to start passing more complex bridge information to dsa_switch_ops functions. For example, with FDB isolation, it is expected that drivers will need to be passed the bridge which requested an FDB/MDB entry to be offloaded, and along with that bridge_dev, the associated bridge_num should be passed too, in case the driver might want to implement an isolation scheme based on that number. We already pass the {bridge_dev, bridge_num} pair to the TX forwarding offload switch API, however we'd like to remove that and squash it into the basic bridge join/leave API. So that means we need to pass this pair to the bridge join/leave API. During dsa_port_bridge_leave, first we unset dp->bridge_dev, then we call the driver's .port_bridge_leave with what used to be our dp->bridge_dev, but provided as an argument. When bridge_dev and bridge_num get folded into a single structure, we need to preserve this behavior in dsa_port_bridge_leave: we need a copy of what used to be in dp->bridge. Switch drivers check bridge membership by comparing dp->bridge_dev with the provided bridge_dev, but now, if we provide the struct dsa_bridge as a pointer, they cannot keep comparing dp->bridge to the provided pointer, since this only points to an on-stack copy. To make this obvious and prevent driver writers from forgetting and doing stupid things, in this new API, the struct dsa_bridge is provided as a full structure (not very large, contains an int and a pointer) instead of a pointer. An explicit comparison function needs to be used to determine bridge membership: dsa_port_offloads_bridge(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:56 +03:00
struct dsa_bridge bridge;
net: dsa: add a "tx_fwd_offload" argument to ->port_bridge_join This is a preparation patch for the removal of the DSA switch methods ->port_bridge_tx_fwd_offload() and ->port_bridge_tx_fwd_unoffload(). The plan is for the switch to report whether it offloads TX forwarding directly as a response to the ->port_bridge_join() method. This change deals with the noisy portion of converting all existing function prototypes to take this new boolean pointer argument. The bool is placed in the cross-chip notifier structure for bridge join, and a reference to it is provided to drivers. In the next change, DSA will then actually look at this value instead of calling ->port_bridge_tx_fwd_offload(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:57 +03:00
bool tx_fwd_offload;
net: dsa: pass extack to .port_bridge_join driver methods As FDB isolation cannot be enforced between VLAN-aware bridges in lack of hardware assistance like extra FID bits, it seems plausible that many DSA switches cannot do it. Therefore, they need to reject configurations with multiple VLAN-aware bridges from the two code paths that can transition towards that state: - joining a VLAN-aware bridge - toggling VLAN awareness on an existing bridge The .port_vlan_filtering method already propagates the netlink extack to the driver, let's propagate it from .port_bridge_join too, to make sure that the driver can use the same function for both. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-25 12:22:23 +03:00
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack;
net: dsa: move notifier info to private header The DSA notifier events and info structure definitions are not meant for DSA drivers and users, but only used internally by the DSA core files. Move them from the public net/dsa.h file to the private dsa_priv.h file. Also use this opportunity to turn the events into an anonymous enum, because we don't care about the values, and this will prevent future conflicts when adding (and sorting) new events. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:51 +03:00
};
net: dsa: add FDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an FDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:53 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_* */
struct dsa_notifier_fdb_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: Remove switchdev dependency from DSA switch notifier chain Currently, the switchdev objects are embedded inside the DSA notifier info. This patch removes this dependency. This is done as a preparation stage before adding support for learning FDB through the switchdev notification chain. Signed-off-by: Arkadi Sharshevsky <arkadis@mellanox.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-08-06 16:15:41 +03:00
const unsigned char *addr;
u16 vid;
net: dsa: request drivers to perform FDB isolation For DSA, to encourage drivers to perform FDB isolation simply means to track which bridge does each FDB and MDB entry belong to. It then becomes the driver responsibility to use something that makes the FDB entry from one bridge not match the FDB lookup of ports from other bridges. The top-level functions where the bridge is determined are: - dsa_port_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_mdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_mdb_{add,del} aka the pre-crosschip-notifier functions. Changing the API to pass a reference to a bridge is not superfluous, and looking at the passed bridge argument is not the same as having the driver look at dsa_to_port(ds, port)->bridge from the ->port_fdb_add() method. DSA installs FDB and MDB entries on shared (CPU and DSA) ports as well, and those do not have any dp->bridge information to retrieve, because they are not in any bridge - they are merely the pipes that serve the user ports that are in one or multiple bridges. The struct dsa_bridge associated with each FDB/MDB entry is encapsulated in a larger "struct dsa_db" database. Although only databases associated to bridges are notified for now, this API will be the starting point for implementing IFF_UNICAST_FLT in DSA. There, the idea is to install FDB entries on the CPU port which belong to the corresponding user port's port database. These are supposed to match only when the port is standalone. It is better to introduce the API in its expected final form than to introduce it for bridges first, then to have to change drivers which may have made one or more assumptions. Drivers can use the provided bridge.num, but they can also use a different numbering scheme that is more convenient. DSA must perform refcounting on the CPU and DSA ports by also taking into account the bridge number. So if two bridges request the same local address, DSA must notify the driver twice, once for each bridge. In fact, if the driver supports FDB isolation, DSA must perform refcounting per bridge, but if the driver doesn't, DSA must refcount host addresses across all bridges, otherwise it would be telling the driver to delete an FDB entry for a bridge and the driver would delete it for all bridges. So introduce a bool fdb_isolation in drivers which would make all bridge databases passed to the cross-chip notifier have the same number (0). This makes dsa_mac_addr_find() -> dsa_db_equal() say that all bridge databases are the same database - which is essentially the legacy behavior. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-25 12:22:22 +03:00
struct dsa_db db;
net: dsa: add FDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_FDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an FDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:53 +03:00
};
net: dsa: support FDB events on offloaded LAG interfaces This change introduces support for installing static FDB entries towards a bridge port that is a LAG of multiple DSA switch ports, as well as support for filtering towards the CPU local FDB entries emitted for LAG interfaces that are bridge ports. Conceptually, host addresses on LAG ports are identical to what we do for plain bridge ports. Whereas FDB entries _towards_ a LAG can't simply be replicated towards all member ports like we do for multicast, or VLAN. Instead we need new driver API. Hardware usually considers a LAG to be a "logical port", and sets the entire LAG as the forwarding destination. The physical egress port selection within the LAG is made by hashing policy, as usual. To represent the logical port corresponding to the LAG, we pass by value a copy of the dsa_lag structure to all switches in the tree that have at least one port in that LAG. To illustrate why a refcounted list of FDB entries is needed in struct dsa_lag, it is enough to say that: - a LAG may be a bridge port and may therefore receive FDB events even while it isn't yet offloaded by any DSA interface - DSA interfaces may be removed from a LAG while that is a bridge port; we don't want FDB entries lingering around, but we don't want to remove entries that are still in use, either For all the cases below to work, the idea is to always keep an FDB entry on a LAG with a reference count equal to the DSA member ports. So: - if a port joins a LAG, it requests the bridge to replay the FDB, and the FDB entries get created, or their refcount gets bumped by one - if a port leaves a LAG, the FDB replay deletes or decrements refcount by one - if an FDB is installed towards a LAG with ports already present, that entry is created (if it doesn't exist) and its refcount is bumped by the amount of ports already present in the LAG echo "Adding FDB entry to bond with existing ports" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond, then removing ports one by one" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp1 nomaster ip link set swp2 nomaster ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:53 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_FDB_* */
struct dsa_notifier_lag_fdb_info {
struct dsa_lag *lag;
const unsigned char *addr;
u16 vid;
net: dsa: request drivers to perform FDB isolation For DSA, to encourage drivers to perform FDB isolation simply means to track which bridge does each FDB and MDB entry belong to. It then becomes the driver responsibility to use something that makes the FDB entry from one bridge not match the FDB lookup of ports from other bridges. The top-level functions where the bridge is determined are: - dsa_port_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_mdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_mdb_{add,del} aka the pre-crosschip-notifier functions. Changing the API to pass a reference to a bridge is not superfluous, and looking at the passed bridge argument is not the same as having the driver look at dsa_to_port(ds, port)->bridge from the ->port_fdb_add() method. DSA installs FDB and MDB entries on shared (CPU and DSA) ports as well, and those do not have any dp->bridge information to retrieve, because they are not in any bridge - they are merely the pipes that serve the user ports that are in one or multiple bridges. The struct dsa_bridge associated with each FDB/MDB entry is encapsulated in a larger "struct dsa_db" database. Although only databases associated to bridges are notified for now, this API will be the starting point for implementing IFF_UNICAST_FLT in DSA. There, the idea is to install FDB entries on the CPU port which belong to the corresponding user port's port database. These are supposed to match only when the port is standalone. It is better to introduce the API in its expected final form than to introduce it for bridges first, then to have to change drivers which may have made one or more assumptions. Drivers can use the provided bridge.num, but they can also use a different numbering scheme that is more convenient. DSA must perform refcounting on the CPU and DSA ports by also taking into account the bridge number. So if two bridges request the same local address, DSA must notify the driver twice, once for each bridge. In fact, if the driver supports FDB isolation, DSA must perform refcounting per bridge, but if the driver doesn't, DSA must refcount host addresses across all bridges, otherwise it would be telling the driver to delete an FDB entry for a bridge and the driver would delete it for all bridges. So introduce a bool fdb_isolation in drivers which would make all bridge databases passed to the cross-chip notifier have the same number (0). This makes dsa_mac_addr_find() -> dsa_db_equal() say that all bridge databases are the same database - which is essentially the legacy behavior. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-25 12:22:22 +03:00
struct dsa_db db;
net: dsa: support FDB events on offloaded LAG interfaces This change introduces support for installing static FDB entries towards a bridge port that is a LAG of multiple DSA switch ports, as well as support for filtering towards the CPU local FDB entries emitted for LAG interfaces that are bridge ports. Conceptually, host addresses on LAG ports are identical to what we do for plain bridge ports. Whereas FDB entries _towards_ a LAG can't simply be replicated towards all member ports like we do for multicast, or VLAN. Instead we need new driver API. Hardware usually considers a LAG to be a "logical port", and sets the entire LAG as the forwarding destination. The physical egress port selection within the LAG is made by hashing policy, as usual. To represent the logical port corresponding to the LAG, we pass by value a copy of the dsa_lag structure to all switches in the tree that have at least one port in that LAG. To illustrate why a refcounted list of FDB entries is needed in struct dsa_lag, it is enough to say that: - a LAG may be a bridge port and may therefore receive FDB events even while it isn't yet offloaded by any DSA interface - DSA interfaces may be removed from a LAG while that is a bridge port; we don't want FDB entries lingering around, but we don't want to remove entries that are still in use, either For all the cases below to work, the idea is to always keep an FDB entry on a LAG with a reference count equal to the DSA member ports. So: - if a port joins a LAG, it requests the bridge to replay the FDB, and the FDB entries get created, or their refcount gets bumped by one - if a port leaves a LAG, the FDB replay deletes or decrements refcount by one - if an FDB is installed towards a LAG with ports already present, that entry is created (if it doesn't exist) and its refcount is bumped by the amount of ports already present in the LAG echo "Adding FDB entry to bond with existing ports" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond, then removing ports one by one" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp1 nomaster ip link set swp2 nomaster ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:53 +03:00
};
net: dsa: add MDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an MDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:54 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_* */
struct dsa_notifier_mdb_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: add MDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an MDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:54 +03:00
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb;
net: dsa: request drivers to perform FDB isolation For DSA, to encourage drivers to perform FDB isolation simply means to track which bridge does each FDB and MDB entry belong to. It then becomes the driver responsibility to use something that makes the FDB entry from one bridge not match the FDB lookup of ports from other bridges. The top-level functions where the bridge is determined are: - dsa_port_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_fdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_mdb_{add,del} - dsa_port_host_mdb_{add,del} aka the pre-crosschip-notifier functions. Changing the API to pass a reference to a bridge is not superfluous, and looking at the passed bridge argument is not the same as having the driver look at dsa_to_port(ds, port)->bridge from the ->port_fdb_add() method. DSA installs FDB and MDB entries on shared (CPU and DSA) ports as well, and those do not have any dp->bridge information to retrieve, because they are not in any bridge - they are merely the pipes that serve the user ports that are in one or multiple bridges. The struct dsa_bridge associated with each FDB/MDB entry is encapsulated in a larger "struct dsa_db" database. Although only databases associated to bridges are notified for now, this API will be the starting point for implementing IFF_UNICAST_FLT in DSA. There, the idea is to install FDB entries on the CPU port which belong to the corresponding user port's port database. These are supposed to match only when the port is standalone. It is better to introduce the API in its expected final form than to introduce it for bridges first, then to have to change drivers which may have made one or more assumptions. Drivers can use the provided bridge.num, but they can also use a different numbering scheme that is more convenient. DSA must perform refcounting on the CPU and DSA ports by also taking into account the bridge number. So if two bridges request the same local address, DSA must notify the driver twice, once for each bridge. In fact, if the driver supports FDB isolation, DSA must perform refcounting per bridge, but if the driver doesn't, DSA must refcount host addresses across all bridges, otherwise it would be telling the driver to delete an FDB entry for a bridge and the driver would delete it for all bridges. So introduce a bool fdb_isolation in drivers which would make all bridge databases passed to the cross-chip notifier have the same number (0). This makes dsa_mac_addr_find() -> dsa_db_equal() say that all bridge databases are the same database - which is essentially the legacy behavior. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-25 12:22:22 +03:00
struct dsa_db db;
net: dsa: add MDB notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_MDB_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an MDB entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:54 +03:00
};
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_LAG_* */
struct dsa_notifier_lag_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: create a dsa_lag structure The main purpose of this change is to create a data structure for a LAG as seen by DSA. This is similar to what we have for bridging - we pass a copy of this structure by value to ->port_lag_join and ->port_lag_leave. For now we keep the lag_dev, id and a reference count in it. Future patches will add a list of FDB entries for the LAG (these also need to be refcounted to work properly). The LAG structure is created using dsa_port_lag_create() and destroyed using dsa_port_lag_destroy(), just like we have for bridging. Because now, the dsa_lag itself is refcounted, we can simplify dsa_lag_map() and dsa_lag_unmap(). These functions need to keep a LAG in the dst->lags array only as long as at least one port uses it. The refcounting logic inside those functions can be removed now - they are called only when we should perform the operation. dsa_lag_dev() is renamed to dsa_lag_by_id() and now returns the dsa_lag structure instead of the lag_dev net_device. dsa_lag_foreach_port() now takes the dsa_lag structure as argument. dst->lags holds an array of dsa_lag structures. dsa_lag_map() now also saves the dsa_lag->id value, so that linear walking of dst->lags in drivers using dsa_lag_id() is no longer necessary. They can just look at lag.id. dsa_port_lag_id_get() is a helper, similar to dsa_port_bridge_num_get(), which can be used by drivers to get the LAG ID assigned by DSA to a given port. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:49 +03:00
struct dsa_lag lag;
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
struct netdev_lag_upper_info *info;
net: dsa: propagate extack to port_lag_join Drivers could refuse to offload a LAG configuration for a variety of reasons, mainly having to do with its TX type. Additionally, since DSA masters may now also be LAG interfaces, and this will translate into a call to port_lag_join on the CPU ports, there may be extra restrictions there. Propagate the netlink extack to this DSA method in order for drivers to give a meaningful error message back to the user. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:07:03 +03:00
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack;
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
};
net: dsa: add VLAN notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an VLAN entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:55 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_* */
struct dsa_notifier_vlan_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: add VLAN notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an VLAN entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:55 +03:00
const struct switchdev_obj_port_vlan *vlan;
net: dsa: propagate extack to .port_vlan_add Allow drivers to communicate their restrictions to user space directly, instead of printing to the kernel log. Where the conversion would have been lossy and things like VLAN ID could no longer be conveyed (due to the lack of support for printf format specifier in netlink extack), I chose to keep the messages in full form to the kernel log only, and leave it up to individual driver maintainers to move more messages to extack. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-13 23:43:18 +03:00
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack;
net: dsa: add VLAN notifier Add two new DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_ADD and DSA_NOTIFIER_VLAN_DEL events to notify not only a single switch, but all switches of a the fabric when an VLAN entry is added or removed. For the moment, keep the current behavior and ignore other switches. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:55 +03:00
};
net: dsa: configure the MTU for switch ports It is useful be able to configure port policers on a switch to accept frames of various sizes: - Increase the MTU for better throughput from the default of 1500 if it is known that there is no 10/100 Mbps device in the network. - Decrease the MTU to limit the latency of high-priority frames under congestion, or work around various network segments that add extra headers to packets which can't be fragmented. For DSA slave ports, this is mostly a pass-through callback, called through the regular ndo ops and at probe time (to ensure consistency across all supported switches). The CPU port is called with an MTU equal to the largest configured MTU of the slave ports. The assumption is that the user might want to sustain a bidirectional conversation with a partner over any switch port. The DSA master is configured the same as the CPU port, plus the tagger overhead. Since the MTU is by definition L2 payload (sans Ethernet header), it is up to each individual driver to figure out if it needs to do anything special for its frame tags on the CPU port (it shouldn't except in special cases). So the MTU does not contain the tagger overhead on the CPU port. However the MTU of the DSA master, minus the tagger overhead, is used as a proxy for the MTU of the CPU port, which does not have a net device. This is to avoid uselessly calling the .change_mtu function on the CPU port when nothing should change. So it is safe to assume that the DSA master and the CPU port MTUs are apart by exactly the tagger's overhead in bytes. Some changes were made around dsa_master_set_mtu(), function which was now removed, for 2 reasons: - dev_set_mtu() already calls dev_validate_mtu(), so it's redundant to do the same thing in DSA - __dev_set_mtu() returns 0 if ops->ndo_change_mtu is an absent method That is to say, there's no need for this function in DSA, we can safely call dev_set_mtu() directly, take the rtnl lock when necessary, and just propagate whatever errors get reported (since the user probably wants to be informed). Some inspiration (mainly in the MTU DSA notifier) was taken from a vaguely similar patch from Murali and Florian, who are credited as co-developers down below. Co-developed-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Co-developed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:42 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_MTU */
struct dsa_notifier_mtu_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: configure the MTU for switch ports It is useful be able to configure port policers on a switch to accept frames of various sizes: - Increase the MTU for better throughput from the default of 1500 if it is known that there is no 10/100 Mbps device in the network. - Decrease the MTU to limit the latency of high-priority frames under congestion, or work around various network segments that add extra headers to packets which can't be fragmented. For DSA slave ports, this is mostly a pass-through callback, called through the regular ndo ops and at probe time (to ensure consistency across all supported switches). The CPU port is called with an MTU equal to the largest configured MTU of the slave ports. The assumption is that the user might want to sustain a bidirectional conversation with a partner over any switch port. The DSA master is configured the same as the CPU port, plus the tagger overhead. Since the MTU is by definition L2 payload (sans Ethernet header), it is up to each individual driver to figure out if it needs to do anything special for its frame tags on the CPU port (it shouldn't except in special cases). So the MTU does not contain the tagger overhead on the CPU port. However the MTU of the DSA master, minus the tagger overhead, is used as a proxy for the MTU of the CPU port, which does not have a net device. This is to avoid uselessly calling the .change_mtu function on the CPU port when nothing should change. So it is safe to assume that the DSA master and the CPU port MTUs are apart by exactly the tagger's overhead in bytes. Some changes were made around dsa_master_set_mtu(), function which was now removed, for 2 reasons: - dev_set_mtu() already calls dev_validate_mtu(), so it's redundant to do the same thing in DSA - __dev_set_mtu() returns 0 if ops->ndo_change_mtu is an absent method That is to say, there's no need for this function in DSA, we can safely call dev_set_mtu() directly, take the rtnl lock when necessary, and just propagate whatever errors get reported (since the user probably wants to be informed). Some inspiration (mainly in the MTU DSA notifier) was taken from a vaguely similar patch from Murali and Florian, who are credited as co-developers down below. Co-developed-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Signed-off-by: Murali Krishna Policharla <murali.policharla@broadcom.com> Co-developed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:42 +03:00
int mtu;
};
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_PROTO_* */
struct dsa_notifier_tag_proto_info {
const struct dsa_device_ops *tag_ops;
};
net: dsa: tag_8021q: add proper cross-chip notifier support The big problem which mandates cross-chip notifiers for tag_8021q is this: | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw0p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] | +---------+ | sw1p0 sw1p1 sw1p2 sw1p3 sw1p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] | +---------+ | sw2p0 sw2p1 sw2p2 sw2p3 sw2p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] When the user runs: ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set sw0p0 master br0 ip link set sw2p0 master br0 It doesn't work. This is because dsa_8021q_crosschip_bridge_join() assumes that "ds" and "other_ds" are at most 1 hop away from each other, so it is sufficient to add the RX VLAN of {ds, port} into {other_ds, other_port} and vice versa and presto, the cross-chip link works. When there is another switch in the middle, such as in this case switch 1 with its DSA links sw1p3 and sw1p4, somebody needs to tell it about these VLANs too. Which is exactly why the problem is quadratic: when a port joins a bridge, for each port in the tree that's already in that same bridge we notify a tag_8021q VLAN addition of that port's RX VLAN to the entire tree. It is a very complicated web of VLANs. It must be mentioned that currently we install tag_8021q VLANs on too many ports (DSA links - to be precise, on all of them). For example, when sw2p0 joins br0, and assuming sw1p0 was part of br0 too, we add the RX VLAN of sw2p0 on the DSA links of switch 0 too, even though there isn't any port of switch 0 that is a member of br0 (at least yet). In theory we could notify only the switches which sit in between the port joining the bridge and the port reacting to that bridge_join event. But in practice that is impossible, because of the way 'link' properties are described in the device tree. The DSA bindings require DT writers to list out not only the real/physical DSA links, but in fact the entire routing table, like for example switch 0 above will have: sw0p3: port@3 { link = <&sw1p4 &sw2p4>; }; This was done because: /* TODO: ideally DSA ports would have a single dp->link_dp member, * and no dst->rtable nor this struct dsa_link would be needed, * but this would require some more complex tree walking, * so keep it stupid at the moment and list them all. */ but it is a perfect example of a situation where too much information is actively detrimential, because we are now in the position where we cannot distinguish a real DSA link from one that is put there to avoid the 'complex tree walking'. And because DT is ABI, there is not much we can change. And because we do not know which DSA links are real and which ones aren't, we can't really know if DSA switch A is in the data path between switches B and C, in the general case. So this is why tag_8021q RX VLANs are added on all DSA links, and probably why it will never change. On the other hand, at least the number of additions/deletions is well balanced, and this means that once we implement reference counting at the cross-chip notifier level a la fdb/mdb, there is absolutely zero need for a struct dsa_8021q_crosschip_link, it's all self-managing. In fact, with the tag_8021q notifiers emitted from the bridge join notifiers, it becomes so generic that sja1105 does not need to do anything anymore, we can just delete its implementation of the .crosschip_bridge_{join,leave} methods. Among other things we can simply delete is the home-grown implementation of sja1105_notify_crosschip_switches(). The reason why that is wrong is because it is not quadratic - it only covers remote switches to which we have a cross-chip bridging link and that does not cover in-between switches. This deletion is part of the same patch because sja1105 used to poke deep inside the guts of the tag_8021q context in order to do that. Because the cross-chip links went away, so needs the sja1105 code. Last but not least, dsa_8021q_setup_port() is simplified (and also renamed). Because our TAG_8021Q_VLAN_ADD notifier is designed to react on the CPU port too, the four dsa_8021q_vid_apply() calls: - 1 for RX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's RX VLAN on the CPU port - 1 for TX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's TX VLAN on the CPU port now get squashed into only 2 notifier calls via dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_add. And because the notifiers to add and to delete a tag_8021q VLAN are distinct, now we finally break up the port setup and teardown into separate functions instead of relying on a "bool enabled" flag which tells us what to do. Arguably it should have been this way from the get go. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:52 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_TAG_8021Q_VLAN_* */
struct dsa_notifier_tag_8021q_vlan_info {
net: dsa: make cross-chip notifiers more efficient for host events To determine whether a given port should react to the port targeted by the notifier, dsa_port_host_vlan_match() and dsa_port_host_address_match() look at the positioning of the switch port currently executing the notifier relative to the switch port for which the notifier was emitted. To maintain stylistic compatibility with the other match functions from switch.c, the host address and host VLAN match functions take the notifier information about targeted port, switch and tree indices as argument. However, these functions only use that information to retrieve the struct dsa_port *targeted_dp, which is an invariant for the outer loop that calls them. So it makes more sense to calculate the targeted dp only once, and pass it to them as argument. But furthermore, the targeted dp is actually known at the time the call to dsa_port_notify() is made. It is just that we decide to only save the indices of the port, switch and tree in the notifier structure, just to retrace our steps and find the dp again using dsa_switch_find() and dsa_to_port(). But both the above functions are relatively expensive, since they need to iterate through lists. It appears more straightforward to make all notifiers just pass the targeted dp inside their info structure, and have the code that needs the indices to look at info->dp->index instead of info->port, or info->dp->ds->index instead of info->sw_index, or info->dp->ds->dst->index instead of info->tree_index. For the sake of consistency, all cross-chip notifiers are converted to pass the "dp" directly. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:22 +03:00
const struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: tag_8021q: add proper cross-chip notifier support The big problem which mandates cross-chip notifiers for tag_8021q is this: | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw0p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] | +---------+ | sw1p0 sw1p1 sw1p2 sw1p3 sw1p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] | +---------+ | sw2p0 sw2p1 sw2p2 sw2p3 sw2p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] When the user runs: ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set sw0p0 master br0 ip link set sw2p0 master br0 It doesn't work. This is because dsa_8021q_crosschip_bridge_join() assumes that "ds" and "other_ds" are at most 1 hop away from each other, so it is sufficient to add the RX VLAN of {ds, port} into {other_ds, other_port} and vice versa and presto, the cross-chip link works. When there is another switch in the middle, such as in this case switch 1 with its DSA links sw1p3 and sw1p4, somebody needs to tell it about these VLANs too. Which is exactly why the problem is quadratic: when a port joins a bridge, for each port in the tree that's already in that same bridge we notify a tag_8021q VLAN addition of that port's RX VLAN to the entire tree. It is a very complicated web of VLANs. It must be mentioned that currently we install tag_8021q VLANs on too many ports (DSA links - to be precise, on all of them). For example, when sw2p0 joins br0, and assuming sw1p0 was part of br0 too, we add the RX VLAN of sw2p0 on the DSA links of switch 0 too, even though there isn't any port of switch 0 that is a member of br0 (at least yet). In theory we could notify only the switches which sit in between the port joining the bridge and the port reacting to that bridge_join event. But in practice that is impossible, because of the way 'link' properties are described in the device tree. The DSA bindings require DT writers to list out not only the real/physical DSA links, but in fact the entire routing table, like for example switch 0 above will have: sw0p3: port@3 { link = <&sw1p4 &sw2p4>; }; This was done because: /* TODO: ideally DSA ports would have a single dp->link_dp member, * and no dst->rtable nor this struct dsa_link would be needed, * but this would require some more complex tree walking, * so keep it stupid at the moment and list them all. */ but it is a perfect example of a situation where too much information is actively detrimential, because we are now in the position where we cannot distinguish a real DSA link from one that is put there to avoid the 'complex tree walking'. And because DT is ABI, there is not much we can change. And because we do not know which DSA links are real and which ones aren't, we can't really know if DSA switch A is in the data path between switches B and C, in the general case. So this is why tag_8021q RX VLANs are added on all DSA links, and probably why it will never change. On the other hand, at least the number of additions/deletions is well balanced, and this means that once we implement reference counting at the cross-chip notifier level a la fdb/mdb, there is absolutely zero need for a struct dsa_8021q_crosschip_link, it's all self-managing. In fact, with the tag_8021q notifiers emitted from the bridge join notifiers, it becomes so generic that sja1105 does not need to do anything anymore, we can just delete its implementation of the .crosschip_bridge_{join,leave} methods. Among other things we can simply delete is the home-grown implementation of sja1105_notify_crosschip_switches(). The reason why that is wrong is because it is not quadratic - it only covers remote switches to which we have a cross-chip bridging link and that does not cover in-between switches. This deletion is part of the same patch because sja1105 used to poke deep inside the guts of the tag_8021q context in order to do that. Because the cross-chip links went away, so needs the sja1105 code. Last but not least, dsa_8021q_setup_port() is simplified (and also renamed). Because our TAG_8021Q_VLAN_ADD notifier is designed to react on the CPU port too, the four dsa_8021q_vid_apply() calls: - 1 for RX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's RX VLAN on the CPU port - 1 for TX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's TX VLAN on the CPU port now get squashed into only 2 notifier calls via dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_add. And because the notifiers to add and to delete a tag_8021q VLAN are distinct, now we finally break up the port setup and teardown into separate functions instead of relying on a "bool enabled" flag which tells us what to do. Arguably it should have been this way from the get go. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:52 +03:00
u16 vid;
};
net: dsa: provide switch operations for tracking the master state Certain drivers may need to send management traffic to the switch for things like register access, FDB dump, etc, to accelerate what their slow bus (SPI, I2C, MDIO) can already do. Ethernet is faster (especially in bulk transactions) but is also more unreliable, since the user may decide to bring the DSA master down (or not bring it up), therefore severing the link between the host and the attached switch. Drivers needing Ethernet-based register access already should have fallback logic to the slow bus if the Ethernet method fails, but that fallback may be based on a timeout, and the I/O to the switch may slow down to a halt if the master is down, because every Ethernet packet will have to time out. The driver also doesn't have the option to turn off Ethernet-based I/O momentarily, because it wouldn't know when to turn it back on. Which is where this change comes in. By tracking NETDEV_CHANGE, NETDEV_UP and NETDEV_GOING_DOWN events on the DSA master, we should know the exact interval of time during which this interface is reliably available for traffic. Provide this information to switches so they can use it as they wish. An helper is added dsa_port_master_is_operational() to check if a master port is operational. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Ansuel Smith <ansuelsmth@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-02 03:03:20 +03:00
/* DSA_NOTIFIER_MASTER_STATE_CHANGE */
struct dsa_notifier_master_state_info {
const struct net_device *master;
bool operational;
};
net: dsa: don't use switchdev_notifier_fdb_info in dsa_switchdev_event_work Currently DSA doesn't add FDB entries on the CPU port, because it only does so through switchdev, which is associated with a net_device, and there are none of those for the CPU port. But actually FDB addresses on the CPU port have some use cases of their own, if the switchdev operations are initiated from within the DSA layer. There is just one problem with the existing code: it passes a structure in dsa_switchdev_event_work which was retrieved directly from switchdev, so it contains a net_device. We need to generalize the contents to something that covers the CPU port as well: the "ds, port" tuple is fine for that. Note that the new procedure for notifying the successful FDB offload is inspired from the rocker model. Also, nothing was being done if added_by_user was false. Let's check for that a lot earlier, and don't actually bother to schedule the worker for nothing. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-06 12:51:32 +03:00
struct dsa_switchdev_event_work {
net: dsa: ensure during dsa_fdb_offload_notify that dev_hold and dev_put are on the same dev When (a) "dev" is a bridge port which the DSA switch tree offloads, but is otherwise not a dsa slave (such as a LAG netdev), or (b) "dev" is the bridge net device itself then strange things happen to the dev_hold/dev_put pair: dsa_schedule_work() will still be called with a DSA port that offloads that netdev, but dev_hold() will be called on the non-DSA netdev. Then the "if" condition in dsa_slave_switchdev_event_work() does not pass, because "dev" is not a DSA netdev, so dev_put() is not called. This results in the simple fact that we have a reference counting mismatch on the "dev" net device. This can be seen when we add support for host addresses installed on the bridge net device. ip link add br1 type bridge ip link set br1 address 00:01:02:03:04:05 ip link set swp0 master br1 ip link del br1 [ 968.512278] unregister_netdevice: waiting for br1 to become free. Usage count = 5 It seems foolish to do penny pinching and not add the net_device pointer in the dsa_switchdev_event_work structure, so let's finally do that. As an added bonus, when we start offloading local entries pointing towards the bridge, these will now properly appear as 'offloaded' in 'bridge fdb' (this was not possible before, because 'dev' was assumed to only be a DSA net device): 00:01:02:03:04:05 dev br0 vlan 1 offload master br0 permanent 00:01:02:03:04:05 dev br0 offload master br0 permanent Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-06-29 17:06:57 +03:00
struct net_device *dev;
net: dsa: call SWITCHDEV_FDB_OFFLOADED for the orig_dev When switchdev_handle_fdb_event_to_device() replicates a FDB event emitted for the bridge or for a LAG port and DSA offloads that, we should notify back to switchdev that the FDB entry on the original device is what was offloaded, not on the DSA slave devices that the event is replicated on. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:52 +03:00
struct net_device *orig_dev;
net: dsa: don't use switchdev_notifier_fdb_info in dsa_switchdev_event_work Currently DSA doesn't add FDB entries on the CPU port, because it only does so through switchdev, which is associated with a net_device, and there are none of those for the CPU port. But actually FDB addresses on the CPU port have some use cases of their own, if the switchdev operations are initiated from within the DSA layer. There is just one problem with the existing code: it passes a structure in dsa_switchdev_event_work which was retrieved directly from switchdev, so it contains a net_device. We need to generalize the contents to something that covers the CPU port as well: the "ds, port" tuple is fine for that. Note that the new procedure for notifying the successful FDB offload is inspired from the rocker model. Also, nothing was being done if added_by_user was false. Let's check for that a lot earlier, and don't actually bother to schedule the worker for nothing. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-06 12:51:32 +03:00
struct work_struct work;
unsigned long event;
/* Specific for SWITCHDEV_FDB_ADD_TO_DEVICE and
* SWITCHDEV_FDB_DEL_TO_DEVICE
*/
unsigned char addr[ETH_ALEN];
u16 vid;
net: dsa: introduce a separate cross-chip notifier type for host FDBs DSA treats some bridge FDB entries by trapping them to the CPU port. Currently, the only class of such entries are FDB addresses learnt by the software bridge on a foreign interface. However there are many more to be added: - FDB entries with the is_local flag (for termination) added by the bridge on the user ports (typically containing the MAC address of the bridge port) - FDB entries pointing towards the bridge net device (for termination). Typically these contain the MAC address of the bridge net device. - Static FDB entries installed on a foreign interface that is in the same bridge with a DSA user port. The reason why a separate cross-chip notifier for host FDBs is justified compared to normal FDBs is the same as in the case of host MDBs: the cross-chip notifier matching function in switch.c should avoid installing these entries on routing ports that route towards the targeted switch, but not towards the CPU. This is required in order to have proper support for H-like multi-chip topologies. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-06-29 17:06:51 +03:00
bool host_addr;
net: dsa: don't use switchdev_notifier_fdb_info in dsa_switchdev_event_work Currently DSA doesn't add FDB entries on the CPU port, because it only does so through switchdev, which is associated with a net_device, and there are none of those for the CPU port. But actually FDB addresses on the CPU port have some use cases of their own, if the switchdev operations are initiated from within the DSA layer. There is just one problem with the existing code: it passes a structure in dsa_switchdev_event_work which was retrieved directly from switchdev, so it contains a net_device. We need to generalize the contents to something that covers the CPU port as well: the "ds, port" tuple is fine for that. Note that the new procedure for notifying the successful FDB offload is inspired from the rocker model. Also, nothing was being done if added_by_user was false. Let's check for that a lot earlier, and don't actually bother to schedule the worker for nothing. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-06 12:51:32 +03:00
};
net: dsa: install secondary unicast and multicast addresses as host FDB/MDB In preparation of disabling flooding towards the CPU in standalone ports mode, identify the addresses requested by upper interfaces and use the new API for DSA FDB isolation to request the hardware driver to offload these as FDB or MDB objects. The objects belong to the user port's database, and are installed pointing towards the CPU port. Because dev_uc_add()/dev_mc_add() is VLAN-unaware, we offload to the port standalone database addresses with VID 0 (also VLAN-unaware). So this excludes switches with global VLAN filtering from supporting unicast filtering, because there, it is possible for a port of a switch to join a VLAN-aware bridge, and this changes the VLAN awareness of standalone ports, requiring VLAN-aware standalone host FDB entries. For the same reason, hellcreek, which requires VLAN awareness in standalone mode, is also exempted from unicast filtering. We create "standalone" variants of dsa_port_host_fdb_add() and dsa_port_host_mdb_add() (and the _del coresponding functions). We also create a separate work item type for handling deferred standalone host FDB/MDB entries compared to the switchdev one. This is done for the purpose of clarity - the procedure for offloading a bridge FDB entry is different than offloading a standalone one, and the switchdev event work handles only FDBs anyway, not MDBs. Deferral is needed for standalone entries because ndo_set_rx_mode runs in atomic context. We could probably optimize things a little by first queuing up all entries that need to be offloaded, and scheduling the work item just once, but the data structures that we can pass through __dev_uc_sync() and __dev_mc_sync() are limiting (there is nothing like a void *priv), so we'd have to keep the list of queued events somewhere in struct dsa_switch, and possibly a lock for it. Too complicated for now. Adding the address to the master is handled by dev_uc_sync(), adding it to the hardware is handled by __dev_uc_sync(). So this is the reason why dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add() does not call dev_uc_add(). Not that it had the rtnl_mutex anyway - ndo_set_rx_mode has it, but is atomic. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:10 +03:00
enum dsa_standalone_event {
DSA_UC_ADD,
DSA_UC_DEL,
DSA_MC_ADD,
DSA_MC_DEL,
};
struct dsa_standalone_event_work {
struct work_struct work;
struct net_device *dev;
enum dsa_standalone_event event;
unsigned char addr[ETH_ALEN];
u16 vid;
};
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
struct dsa_slave_priv {
net: dsa: add tagging ops to port The DSA tagging protocol operations are specific to each CPU port, thus the dsa_device_ops pointer belongs to the dsa_port structure. >From now on assign a slave's xmit copy from its CPU port tagging operations. This will ease the future support for multiple CPU ports. Also keep the tag_ops at the beginning of the dsa_port structure so that we ensure copies for hot path are in cacheline 1. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:18 +03:00
/* Copy of CPU port xmit for faster access in slave transmit hot path */
net: dsa: Refactor transmit path to eliminate duplication All tagging protocols do the same thing: increment device statistics, make room for the tag to be inserted, create the tag, invoke the parent network device transmit function. In order to prepare for adding netpoll support, which requires the tag creation, but not using the parent network device transmit function, do some little refactoring which eliminates duplication between the 4 tagging protocols supported. We need to return a sk_buff pointer back to the caller because the tag specific transmit function may have to reallocate the original skb (e.g: tag_trailer.c) and this is the one we should be transmitting, not the original sk_buff we were passed. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2015-07-31 21:42:56 +03:00
struct sk_buff * (*xmit)(struct sk_buff *skb,
dsa: Split ops up, and avoid assigning tag_protocol and receive separately This change addresses several issues. First, it was possible to set tag_protocol without setting the ops pointer. To correct that I have reordered things so that rcv is now populated before we set tag_protocol. Second, it didn't make much sense to keep setting the device ops each time a new slave was registered. So by moving the receive portion out into root switch initialization that issue should be addressed. Third, I wanted to avoid sending tags if the rcv pointer was not registered so I changed the tag check to verify if the rcv function pointer is set on the root tree. If it is then we start sending DSA tagged frames. Finally I split the device ops pointer in the structures into two spots. I placed the rcv function pointer in the root switch since this makes it easiest to access from there, and I placed the xmit function pointer in the slave for the same reason. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2014-09-15 21:00:19 +04:00
struct net_device *dev);
dsa: add switch chip cascading support The initial version of the DSA driver only supported a single switch chip per network interface, while DSA-capable switch chips can be interconnected to form a tree of switch chips. This patch adds support for multiple switch chips on a network interface. An example topology for a 16-port device with an embedded CPU is as follows: +-----+ +--------+ +--------+ | |eth0 10| switch |9 10| switch | | CPU +----------+ +-------+ | | | | chip 0 | | chip 1 | +-----+ +---++---+ +---++---+ || || || || ||1000baseT ||1000baseT ||ports 1-8 ||ports 9-16 This requires a couple of interdependent changes in the DSA layer: - The dsa platform driver data needs to be extended: there is still only one netdevice per DSA driver instance (eth0 in the example above), but each of the switch chips in the tree needs its own mii_bus device pointer, MII management bus address, and port name array. (include/net/dsa.h) The existing in-tree dsa users need some small changes to deal with this. (arch/arm) - The DSA and Ethertype DSA tagging modules need to be extended to use the DSA device ID field on receive and demultiplex the packet accordingly, and fill in the DSA device ID field on transmit according to which switch chip the packet is heading to. (net/dsa/tag_{dsa,edsa}.c) - The concept of "CPU port", which is the switch chip port that the CPU is connected to (port 10 on switch chip 0 in the example), needs to be extended with the concept of "upstream port", which is the port on the switch chip that will bring us one hop closer to the CPU (port 10 for both switch chips in the example above). - The dsa platform data needs to specify which ports on which switch chips are links to other switch chips, so that we can enable DSA tagging mode on them. (For inter-switch links, we always use non-EtherType DSA tagging, since it has lower overhead. The CPU link uses dsa or edsa tagging depending on what the 'root' switch chip supports.) This is done by specifying "dsa" for the given port in the port array. - The dsa platform data needs to be extended with information on via which port to reach any given switch chip from any given switch chip. This info is specified via the per-switch chip data struct ->rtable[] array, which gives the nexthop ports for each of the other switches in the tree. For the example topology above, the dsa platform data would look something like this: static struct dsa_chip_data sw[2] = { { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 1, .port_names[0] = "p1", .port_names[1] = "p2", .port_names[2] = "p3", .port_names[3] = "p4", .port_names[4] = "p5", .port_names[5] = "p6", .port_names[6] = "p7", .port_names[7] = "p8", .port_names[9] = "dsa", .port_names[10] = "cpu", .rtable = (s8 []){ -1, 9, }, }, { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 2, .port_names[0] = "p9", .port_names[1] = "p10", .port_names[2] = "p11", .port_names[3] = "p12", .port_names[4] = "p13", .port_names[5] = "p14", .port_names[6] = "p15", .port_names[7] = "p16", .port_names[10] = "dsa", .rtable = (s8 []){ 10, -1, }, }, }, static struct dsa_platform_data pd = { .netdev = &foo, .nr_switches = 2, .sw = sw, }; Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Gary Thomas <gary@mlbassoc.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-03-20 12:52:09 +03:00
net: dsa: add GRO support via gro_cells gro_cells lib is used by different encapsulating netdevices, such as geneve, macsec, vxlan etc. to speed up decapsulated traffic processing. CPU tag is a sort of "encapsulation", and we can use the same mechs to greatly improve overall DSA performance. skbs are passed to the GRO layer after removing CPU tags, so we don't need any new packet offload types as it was firstly proposed by me in the first GRO-over-DSA variant [1]. The size of struct gro_cells is sizeof(void *), so hot struct dsa_slave_priv becomes only 4/8 bytes bigger, and all critical fields remain in one 32-byte cacheline. The other positive side effect is that drivers for network devices that can be shipped as CPU ports of DSA-driven switches can now use napi_gro_frags() to pass skbs to kernel. Packets built that way are completely non-linear and are likely being dropped without GRO. This was tested on to-be-mainlined-soon Ethernet driver that uses napi_gro_frags(), and the overall performance was on par with the variant from [1], sometimes even better due to minimal overhead. net.core.gro_normal_batch tuning may help to push it to the limit on particular setups and platforms. iperf3 IPoE VLAN NAT TCP forwarding (port1.218 -> port0) setup on 1.2 GHz MIPS board: 5.7-rc2 baseline: [ID] Interval Transfer Bitrate Retr [ 5] 0.00-120.01 sec 9.00 GBytes 644 Mbits/sec 413 sender [ 5] 0.00-120.00 sec 8.99 GBytes 644 Mbits/sec receiver Iface RX packets TX packets eth0 7097731 7097702 port0 426050 6671829 port1 6671681 425862 port1.218 6671677 425851 With this patch: [ID] Interval Transfer Bitrate Retr [ 5] 0.00-120.01 sec 12.2 GBytes 870 Mbits/sec 122 sender [ 5] 0.00-120.00 sec 12.2 GBytes 870 Mbits/sec receiver Iface RX packets TX packets eth0 9474792 9474777 port0 455200 353288 port1 9019592 455035 port1.218 353144 455024 v2: - Add some performance examples in the commit message; - No functional changes. [1] https://lore.kernel.org/netdev/20191230143028.27313-1-alobakin@dlink.ru/ Signed-off-by: Alexander Lobakin <bloodyreaper@yandex.ru> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-04-21 16:41:08 +03:00
struct gro_cells gcells;
net: dsa: store a dsa_port in dsa_slave_priv Store a pointer to the dsa_port structure in the dsa_slave_priv structure, instead of the switch/port index. This will allow to store more information such as the bridge device, needed in DSA drivers for multi-chip configuration. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-01-27 23:29:39 +03:00
/* DSA port data, such as switch, port index, etc. */
struct dsa_port *dp;
dsa: add switch chip cascading support The initial version of the DSA driver only supported a single switch chip per network interface, while DSA-capable switch chips can be interconnected to form a tree of switch chips. This patch adds support for multiple switch chips on a network interface. An example topology for a 16-port device with an embedded CPU is as follows: +-----+ +--------+ +--------+ | |eth0 10| switch |9 10| switch | | CPU +----------+ +-------+ | | | | chip 0 | | chip 1 | +-----+ +---++---+ +---++---+ || || || || ||1000baseT ||1000baseT ||ports 1-8 ||ports 9-16 This requires a couple of interdependent changes in the DSA layer: - The dsa platform driver data needs to be extended: there is still only one netdevice per DSA driver instance (eth0 in the example above), but each of the switch chips in the tree needs its own mii_bus device pointer, MII management bus address, and port name array. (include/net/dsa.h) The existing in-tree dsa users need some small changes to deal with this. (arch/arm) - The DSA and Ethertype DSA tagging modules need to be extended to use the DSA device ID field on receive and demultiplex the packet accordingly, and fill in the DSA device ID field on transmit according to which switch chip the packet is heading to. (net/dsa/tag_{dsa,edsa}.c) - The concept of "CPU port", which is the switch chip port that the CPU is connected to (port 10 on switch chip 0 in the example), needs to be extended with the concept of "upstream port", which is the port on the switch chip that will bring us one hop closer to the CPU (port 10 for both switch chips in the example above). - The dsa platform data needs to specify which ports on which switch chips are links to other switch chips, so that we can enable DSA tagging mode on them. (For inter-switch links, we always use non-EtherType DSA tagging, since it has lower overhead. The CPU link uses dsa or edsa tagging depending on what the 'root' switch chip supports.) This is done by specifying "dsa" for the given port in the port array. - The dsa platform data needs to be extended with information on via which port to reach any given switch chip from any given switch chip. This info is specified via the per-switch chip data struct ->rtable[] array, which gives the nexthop ports for each of the other switches in the tree. For the example topology above, the dsa platform data would look something like this: static struct dsa_chip_data sw[2] = { { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 1, .port_names[0] = "p1", .port_names[1] = "p2", .port_names[2] = "p3", .port_names[3] = "p4", .port_names[4] = "p5", .port_names[5] = "p6", .port_names[6] = "p7", .port_names[7] = "p8", .port_names[9] = "dsa", .port_names[10] = "cpu", .rtable = (s8 []){ -1, 9, }, }, { .mii_bus = &foo, .sw_addr = 2, .port_names[0] = "p9", .port_names[1] = "p10", .port_names[2] = "p11", .port_names[3] = "p12", .port_names[4] = "p13", .port_names[5] = "p14", .port_names[6] = "p15", .port_names[7] = "p16", .port_names[10] = "dsa", .rtable = (s8 []){ 10, -1, }, }, }, static struct dsa_platform_data pd = { .netdev = &foo, .nr_switches = 2, .sw = sw, }; Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Gary Thomas <gary@mlbassoc.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2009-03-20 12:52:09 +03:00
net: dsa: Add netconsole support Add support for using DSA slave network devices with netconsole, which requires us to allocate and free custom netpoll instances and invoke the parent network device poll controller callback. In order for netconsole to work, we need to construct the DSA tag, but not queue the skb for transmission on the master network device xmit function. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2015-07-31 21:42:57 +03:00
#ifdef CONFIG_NET_POLL_CONTROLLER
struct netpoll *netpoll;
#endif
net: dsa: Add plumbing for port mirroring Add necessary plumbing at the slave network device level to have switch drivers implement ndo_setup_tc() and most particularly the cls_matchall classifier. We add support for two switch operations: port_add_mirror and port_del_mirror() which configure, on a per-port basis the mirror parameters requested from the cls_matchall classifier. Code is largely borrowed from the Mellanox Spectrum switch driver. Reviewed-by: Jiri Pirko <jiri@mellanox.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-01-30 23:41:40 +03:00
/* TC context */
struct list_head mall_tc_list;
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
};
/* dsa.c */
dsa: Rename dsa_resolve_tag_protocol() to _get ready for locking dsa_resolve_tag_protocol() is used to find the tagging driver needed by a switch driver. When the tagging drivers become modules, it will be necassary to take a reference on the module to prevent it being unloaded. So rename this function to _get() to indicate it has some locking properties. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2019-04-28 20:37:18 +03:00
const struct dsa_device_ops *dsa_tag_driver_get(int tag_protocol);
dsa: Add stub tag driver put method When a DSA switch driver is unloaded, the lock on the tag driver should be released so the module can be unloaded. Add the needed calls, but leave the actual release code as a stub. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> v2 Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2019-04-28 20:37:19 +03:00
void dsa_tag_driver_put(const struct dsa_device_ops *ops);
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
const struct dsa_device_ops *dsa_find_tagger_by_name(const char *buf);
dsa: Rename dsa_resolve_tag_protocol() to _get ready for locking dsa_resolve_tag_protocol() is used to find the tagging driver needed by a switch driver. When the tagging drivers become modules, it will be necassary to take a reference on the module to prevent it being unloaded. So rename this function to _get() to indicate it has some locking properties. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2019-04-28 20:37:18 +03:00
net: dsa: felix: avoid early deletion of host FDB entries The Felix driver declares FDB isolation but puts all standalone ports in VID 0. This is mostly problem-free as discussed with Alvin here: https://patchwork.kernel.org/project/netdevbpf/cover/20220302191417.1288145-1-vladimir.oltean@nxp.com/#24763870 however there is one catch. DSA still thinks that FDB entries are installed on the CPU port as many times as there are user ports, and this is problematic when multiple user ports share the same MAC address. Consider the default case where all user ports inherit their MAC address from the DSA master, and then the user runs: ip link set swp0 address 00:01:02:03:04:05 The above will make dsa_slave_set_mac_address() call dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add() for 00:01:02:03:04:05 in port 0's standalone database, and dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_del() for the old address of swp0, again in swp0's standalone database. Both the ->port_fdb_add() and ->port_fdb_del() will be propagated down to the felix driver, which will end up deleting the old MAC address from the CPU port. But this is still in use by other user ports, so we end up breaking unicast termination for them. There isn't a problem in the fact that DSA keeps track of host standalone addresses in the individual database of each user port: some drivers like sja1105 need this. There also isn't a problem in the fact that some drivers choose the same VID/FID for all standalone ports. It is just that the deletion of these host addresses must be delayed until they are known to not be in use any longer, and only the driver has this knowledge. Since DSA keeps these addresses in &cpu_dp->fdbs and &cpu_db->mdbs, it is just a matter of walking over those lists and see whether the same MAC address is present on the CPU port in the port db of another user port. I have considered reusing the generic dsa_port_walk_fdbs() and dsa_port_walk_mdbs() schemes for this, but locking makes it difficult. In the ->port_fdb_add() method and co, &dp->addr_lists_lock is held, but dsa_port_walk_fdbs() also acquires that lock. Also, even assuming that we introduce an unlocked variant of the address iterator, we'd still need some relatively complex data structures, and a void *ctx in the dsa_fdb_walk_cb_t which we don't currently pass, such that drivers are able to figure out, after iterating, whether the same MAC address is or isn't present in the port db of another port. All the above, plus the fact that I expect other drivers to follow the same model as felix where all standalone ports use the same FID, made me conclude that a generic method provided by DSA is necessary: dsa_fdb_present_in_other_db() and the mdb equivalent. Felix calls this from the ->port_fdb_del() handler for the CPU port, when the database was classified to either a port db, or a LAG db. For symmetry, we also call this from ->port_fdb_add(), because if the address was installed once, then installing it a second time serves no purpose: it's already in hardware in VID 0 and it affects all standalone ports. This change moves dsa_db_equal() from switch.c to dsa.c, since it now has one more caller. Fixes: 54c319846086 ("net: mscc: ocelot: enforce FDB isolation when VLAN-unaware") Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-08 12:15:15 +03:00
bool dsa_db_equal(const struct dsa_db *a, const struct dsa_db *b);
net: dsa: Add support for learning FDB through notification Add support for learning FDB through notification. The driver defers the hardware update via ordered work queue. In case of a successful FDB add a notification is sent back to bridge. In case of hw FDB del failure the static FDB will be deleted from the bridge, thus, the interface is moved to down state in order to indicate inconsistent situation. Signed-off-by: Arkadi Sharshevsky <arkadis@mellanox.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-08-06 16:15:42 +03:00
bool dsa_schedule_work(struct work_struct *work);
net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space There is no way for user-space to know what a given DSA network device's tagging protocol is. Expose this information through a dsa/tagging attribute which reflects the tagging protocol currently in use. This is helpful for configuration (e.g: none behaves dramatically different wrt. bridges) as well as for packet capture tools when there is not a proper Ethernet type available. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2018-09-07 21:09:02 +03:00
const char *dsa_tag_protocol_to_str(const struct dsa_device_ops *ops);
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
net: dsa: generalize overhead for taggers that use both headers and trailers Some really really weird switches just couldn't decide whether to use a normal or a tail tagger, so they just did both. This creates problems for DSA, because we only have the concept of an 'overhead' which can be applied to the headroom or to the tailroom of the skb (like for example during the central TX reallocation procedure), depending on the value of bool tail_tag, but not to both. We need to generalize DSA to cater for these odd switches by transforming the 'overhead / tail_tag' pair into 'needed_headroom / needed_tailroom'. The DSA master's MTU is increased to account for both. The flow dissector code is modified such that it only calls the DSA adjustment callback if the tagger has a non-zero header length. Taggers are trivially modified to declare either needed_headroom or needed_tailroom, based on the tail_tag value that they currently declare. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-06-11 22:01:24 +03:00
static inline int dsa_tag_protocol_overhead(const struct dsa_device_ops *ops)
{
return ops->needed_headroom + ops->needed_tailroom;
}
net: dsa: move master ethtool code DSA overrides the master device ethtool ops, so that it can inject stats from its dedicated switch CPU port as well. The related code is currently split in dsa.c and slave.c, but it only scopes the master net device. Move it to a new master.c DSA core file. This file will be later extented with master net device specific code. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-19 18:57:00 +03:00
/* master.c */
net: dsa: setup and teardown master device Add DSA helpers to setup and teardown a master net device wired to its CPU port. This centralizes the dsa_ptr assignment. This also makes the master ethtool helpers static at the same time. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-11-07 00:11:45 +03:00
int dsa_master_setup(struct net_device *dev, struct dsa_port *cpu_dp);
void dsa_master_teardown(struct net_device *dev);
net: dsa: move master ethtool code DSA overrides the master device ethtool ops, so that it can inject stats from its dedicated switch CPU port as well. The related code is currently split in dsa.c and slave.c, but it only scopes the master net device. Move it to a new master.c DSA core file. This file will be later extented with master net device specific code. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-19 18:57:00 +03:00
net: dsa: rename dsa_master_get_slave The dsa_master_get_slave is slightly confusing since the idiomatic "get" term often suggests reference counting, in symmetry to "put". Rename it to dsa_master_find_slave to make the look up operation clear. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-16 18:12:17 +03:00
static inline struct net_device *dsa_master_find_slave(struct net_device *dev,
int device, int port)
net: dsa: add master helper to look up slaves The DSA tagging code does not need to know about the DSA architecture, it only needs to return the slave device corresponding to the source port index (and eventually the source device index for cascade-capable switches) parsed from the frame received on the master device. For this purpose, provide an inline dsa_master_get_slave helper which validates the device and port indexes and look up the slave device. This makes the tagging rcv functions more concise and robust, and also makes dsa_get_cpu_port obsolete. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:15 +03:00
{
net: dsa: change dsa_ptr for a dsa_port With DSA, a master net device (CPU facing interface) has a dsa_ptr pointer to which hangs a dsa_switch_tree. This is not correct because a master interface is wired to a dedicated switch port, and because we can theoretically have several master interfaces pointing to several CPU ports of the same switch fabric. Change the master interface's dsa_ptr for the CPU dsa_port pointer. This is a step towards supporting multiple CPU ports. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:20 +03:00
struct dsa_port *cpu_dp = dev->dsa_ptr;
struct dsa_switch_tree *dst = cpu_dp->dst;
net: dsa: use ports list to find slave Use the new ports list instead of iterating over switches and their ports when looking for a slave device from a given master interface. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <jakub.kicinski@netronome.com>
2019-10-21 23:51:18 +03:00
struct dsa_port *dp;
net: dsa: add master helper to look up slaves The DSA tagging code does not need to know about the DSA architecture, it only needs to return the slave device corresponding to the source port index (and eventually the source device index for cascade-capable switches) parsed from the frame received on the master device. For this purpose, provide an inline dsa_master_get_slave helper which validates the device and port indexes and look up the slave device. This makes the tagging rcv functions more concise and robust, and also makes dsa_get_cpu_port obsolete. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:15 +03:00
net: dsa: use ports list to find slave Use the new ports list instead of iterating over switches and their ports when looking for a slave device from a given master interface. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <jakub.kicinski@netronome.com>
2019-10-21 23:51:18 +03:00
list_for_each_entry(dp, &dst->ports, list)
if (dp->ds->index == device && dp->index == port &&
dp->type == DSA_PORT_TYPE_USER)
return dp->slave;
net: dsa: add master helper to look up slaves The DSA tagging code does not need to know about the DSA architecture, it only needs to return the slave device corresponding to the source port index (and eventually the source device index for cascade-capable switches) parsed from the frame received on the master device. For this purpose, provide an inline dsa_master_get_slave helper which validates the device and port indexes and look up the slave device. This makes the tagging rcv functions more concise and robust, and also makes dsa_get_cpu_port obsolete. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:15 +03:00
net: dsa: use ports list to find slave Use the new ports list instead of iterating over switches and their ports when looking for a slave device from a given master interface. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <jakub.kicinski@netronome.com>
2019-10-21 23:51:18 +03:00
return NULL;
net: dsa: add master helper to look up slaves The DSA tagging code does not need to know about the DSA architecture, it only needs to return the slave device corresponding to the source port index (and eventually the source device index for cascade-capable switches) parsed from the frame received on the master device. For this purpose, provide an inline dsa_master_get_slave helper which validates the device and port indexes and look up the slave device. This makes the tagging rcv functions more concise and robust, and also makes dsa_get_cpu_port obsolete. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-30 00:19:15 +03:00
}
net: dsa: allow the DSA master to be seen and changed through rtnetlink Some DSA switches have multiple CPU ports, which can be used to improve CPU termination throughput, but DSA, through dsa_tree_setup_cpu_ports(), sets up only the first one, leading to suboptimal use of hardware. The desire is to not change the default configuration but to permit the user to create a dynamic mapping between individual user ports and the CPU port that they are served by, configurable through rtnetlink. It is also intended to permit load balancing between CPU ports, and in that case, the foreseen model is for the DSA master to be a bonding interface whose lowers are the physical DSA masters. To that end, we create a struct rtnl_link_ops for DSA user ports with the "dsa" kind. We expose the IFLA_DSA_MASTER link attribute that contains the ifindex of the newly desired DSA master. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:59 +03:00
/* netlink.c */
extern struct rtnl_link_ops dsa_link_ops __read_mostly;
net: dsa: move port state setters Add a new port.c file to hold all DSA port-wide logic. This patch moves in the code which sets a port state. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:44 +03:00
/* port.c */
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
void dsa_port_set_tag_protocol(struct dsa_port *cpu_dp,
const struct dsa_device_ops *tag_ops);
net: dsa: don't fast age standalone ports DSA drives the procedure to flush dynamic FDB entries from a port based on the change of STP state: whenever we go from a state where address learning is enabled (LEARNING, FORWARDING) to a state where it isn't (LISTENING, BLOCKING, DISABLED), we need to flush the existing dynamic entries. However, there are cases when this is not needed. Internally, when a DSA switch interface is not under a bridge, DSA still keeps it in the "FORWARDING" STP state. And when that interface joins a bridge, the bridge will meticulously iterate that port through all STP states, starting with BLOCKING and ending with FORWARDING. Because there is a state transition from the standalone version of FORWARDING into the temporary BLOCKING bridge port state, DSA calls the fast age procedure. Since commit 5e38c15856e9 ("net: dsa: configure better brport flags when ports leave the bridge"), DSA asks standalone ports to disable address learning. Therefore, there can be no dynamic FDB entries on a standalone port. Therefore, it does not make sense to flush dynamic FDB entries on one. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-08 14:16:37 +03:00
int dsa_port_set_state(struct dsa_port *dp, u8 state, bool do_fast_age);
net: dsa: Handle MST state changes Add the usual trampoline functionality from the generic DSA layer down to the drivers for MST state changes. When a state changes to disabled/blocking/listening, make sure to fast age any dynamic entries in the affected VLANs (those controlled by the MSTI in question). Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-03-16 18:08:54 +03:00
int dsa_port_set_mst_state(struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_mst_state *state,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: fix phylink_start()/phylink_stop() calls Place phylink_start()/phylink_stop() inside dsa_port_enable() and dsa_port_disable(), which ensures that we call phylink_stop() before tearing down phylink - which is a documented requirement. Failure to do so can cause use-after-free bugs. Fixes: 0e27921816ad ("net: dsa: Use PHYLINK for the CPU/DSA ports") Signed-off-by: Russell King <rmk+kernel@armlinux.org.uk> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-03 18:01:46 +03:00
int dsa_port_enable_rt(struct dsa_port *dp, struct phy_device *phy);
net: dsa: add port enable and disable helpers Provide dsa_port_enable and dsa_port_disable helpers to respectively enable and disable a switch port. This makes the dsa_port_set_state_now helper static. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-23 02:01:56 +03:00
int dsa_port_enable(struct dsa_port *dp, struct phy_device *phy);
net: dsa: fix phylink_start()/phylink_stop() calls Place phylink_start()/phylink_stop() inside dsa_port_enable() and dsa_port_disable(), which ensures that we call phylink_stop() before tearing down phylink - which is a documented requirement. Failure to do so can cause use-after-free bugs. Fixes: 0e27921816ad ("net: dsa: Use PHYLINK for the CPU/DSA ports") Signed-off-by: Russell King <rmk+kernel@armlinux.org.uk> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-03 18:01:46 +03:00
void dsa_port_disable_rt(struct dsa_port *dp);
dsa: Remove phydev parameter from disable_port call No current DSA driver makes use of the phydev parameter passed to the disable_port call. Remove it. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2019-02-24 22:44:43 +03:00
void dsa_port_disable(struct dsa_port *dp);
net: dsa: pass extack to dsa_port_{bridge,lag}_join This is a pretty noisy change that was broken out of the larger change for replaying switchdev attributes and objects at bridge join time, which is when these extack objects are actually used. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-03-23 02:51:48 +03:00
int dsa_port_bridge_join(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *br,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: bridge: move the switchdev object replay helpers to "push" mode Starting with commit 4f2673b3a2b6 ("net: bridge: add helper to replay port and host-joined mdb entries"), DSA has introduced some bridge helpers that replay switchdev events (FDB/MDB/VLAN additions and deletions) that can be lost by the switchdev drivers in a variety of circumstances: - an IP multicast group was host-joined on the bridge itself before any switchdev port joined the bridge, leading to the host MDB entries missing in the hardware database. - during the bridge creation process, the MAC address of the bridge was added to the FDB as an entry pointing towards the bridge device itself, but with no switchdev ports being part of the bridge yet, this local FDB entry would remain unknown to the switchdev hardware database. - a VLAN/FDB/MDB was added to a bridge port that is a LAG interface, before any switchdev port joined that LAG, leading to the hardware database missing those entries. - a switchdev port left a LAG that is a bridge port, while the LAG remained part of the bridge, and all FDB/MDB/VLAN entries remained installed in the hardware database of the switchdev port. Also, since commit 0d2cfbd41c4a ("net: bridge: ignore switchdev events for LAG ports which didn't request replay"), DSA introduced a method, based on a const void *ctx, to ensure that two switchdev ports under the same LAG that is a bridge port do not see the same MDB/VLAN entry being replayed twice by the bridge, once for every bridge port that joins the LAG. With so many ordering corner cases being possible, it seems unreasonable to expect a switchdev driver writer to get it right from the first try. Therefore, now that DSA has experimented with the bridge replay helpers for a little bit, we can move the code to the bridge driver where it is more readily available to all switchdev drivers. To convert the switchdev object replay helpers from "pull mode" (where the driver asks for them) to a "push mode" (where the bridge offers them automatically), the biggest problem is that the bridge needs to be aware when a switchdev port joins and leaves, even when the switchdev is only indirectly a bridge port (for example when the bridge port is a LAG upper of the switchdev). Luckily, we already have a hook for that, in the form of the newly introduced switchdev_bridge_port_offload() and switchdev_bridge_port_unoffload() calls. These offer a natural place for hooking the object addition and deletion replays. Extend the above 2 functions with: - pointers to the switchdev atomic notifier (for FDB replays) and the blocking notifier (for MDB and VLAN replays). - the "const void *ctx" argument required for drivers to be able to disambiguate between which port is targeted, when multiple ports are lowers of the same LAG that is a bridge port. Most of the drivers pass NULL to this argument, except the ones that support LAG offload and have the proper context check already in place in the switchdev blocking notifier handler. Also unexport the replay helpers, since nobody except the bridge calls them directly now. Note that: (a) we abuse the terminology slightly, because FDB entries are not "switchdev objects", but we count them as objects nonetheless. With no direct way to prove it, I think they are not modeled as switchdev objects because those can only be installed by the bridge to the hardware (as opposed to FDB entries which can be propagated in the other direction too). This is merely an abuse of terms, FDB entries are replayed too, despite not being objects. (b) the bridge does not attempt to sync port attributes to newly joined ports, just the countable stuff (the objects). The reason for this is simple: no universal and symmetric way to sync and unsync them is known. For example, VLAN filtering: what to do on unsync, disable or leave it enabled? Similarly, STP state, ageing timer, etc etc. What a switchdev port does when it becomes standalone again is not really up to the bridge's competence, and the driver should deal with it. On the other hand, replaying deletions of switchdev objects can be seen a matter of cleanup and therefore be treated by the bridge, hence this patch. We make the replay helpers opt-in for drivers, because they might not bring immediate benefits for them: - nbp_vlan_init() is called _after_ netdev_master_upper_dev_link(), so br_vlan_replay() should not do anything for the new drivers on which we call it. The existing drivers where there was even a slight possibility for there to exist a VLAN on a bridge port before they join it are already guarded against this: mlxsw and prestera deny joining LAG interfaces that are members of a bridge. - br_fdb_replay() should now notify of local FDB entries, but I patched all drivers except DSA to ignore these new entries in commit 2c4eca3ef716 ("net: bridge: switchdev: include local flag in FDB notifications"). Driver authors can lift this restriction as they wish, and when they do, they can also opt into the FDB replay functionality. - br_mdb_replay() should fix a real issue which is described in commit 4f2673b3a2b6 ("net: bridge: add helper to replay port and host-joined mdb entries"). However most drivers do not offload the SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_HOST_MDB to see this issue: only cpsw and am65_cpsw offload this switchdev object, and I don't completely understand the way in which they offload this switchdev object anyway. So I'll leave it up to these drivers' respective maintainers to opt into br_mdb_replay(). So most of the drivers pass NULL notifier blocks for the replay helpers, except: - dpaa2-switch which was already acked/regression-tested with the helpers enabled (and there isn't much of a downside in having them) - ocelot which already had replay logic in "pull" mode - DSA which already had replay logic in "pull" mode An important observation is that the drivers which don't currently request bridge event replays don't even have the switchdev_bridge_port_{offload,unoffload} calls placed in proper places right now. This was done to avoid unnecessary rework for drivers which might never even add support for this. For driver writers who wish to add replay support, this can be used as a tentative placement guide: https://patchwork.kernel.org/project/netdevbpf/patch/20210720134655.892334-11-vladimir.oltean@nxp.com/ Cc: Vadym Kochan <vkochan@marvell.com> Cc: Taras Chornyi <tchornyi@marvell.com> Cc: Ioana Ciornei <ioana.ciornei@nxp.com> Cc: Lars Povlsen <lars.povlsen@microchip.com> Cc: Steen Hegelund <Steen.Hegelund@microchip.com> Cc: UNGLinuxDriver@microchip.com Cc: Claudiu Manoil <claudiu.manoil@nxp.com> Cc: Alexandre Belloni <alexandre.belloni@bootlin.com> Cc: Grygorii Strashko <grygorii.strashko@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Acked-by: Ioana Ciornei <ioana.ciornei@nxp.com> # dpaa2-switch Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-21 19:24:03 +03:00
void dsa_port_pre_bridge_leave(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *br);
net: dsa: move bridging routines Move the DSA port code which bridges a port in port.c, where it belongs. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:45 +03:00
void dsa_port_bridge_leave(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *br);
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
int dsa_port_lag_change(struct dsa_port *dp,
struct netdev_lag_lower_state_info *linfo);
int dsa_port_lag_join(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *lag_dev,
net: dsa: pass extack to dsa_port_{bridge,lag}_join This is a pretty noisy change that was broken out of the larger change for replaying switchdev attributes and objects at bridge join time, which is when these extack objects are actually used. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-03-23 02:51:48 +03:00
struct netdev_lag_upper_info *uinfo,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: bridge: move the switchdev object replay helpers to "push" mode Starting with commit 4f2673b3a2b6 ("net: bridge: add helper to replay port and host-joined mdb entries"), DSA has introduced some bridge helpers that replay switchdev events (FDB/MDB/VLAN additions and deletions) that can be lost by the switchdev drivers in a variety of circumstances: - an IP multicast group was host-joined on the bridge itself before any switchdev port joined the bridge, leading to the host MDB entries missing in the hardware database. - during the bridge creation process, the MAC address of the bridge was added to the FDB as an entry pointing towards the bridge device itself, but with no switchdev ports being part of the bridge yet, this local FDB entry would remain unknown to the switchdev hardware database. - a VLAN/FDB/MDB was added to a bridge port that is a LAG interface, before any switchdev port joined that LAG, leading to the hardware database missing those entries. - a switchdev port left a LAG that is a bridge port, while the LAG remained part of the bridge, and all FDB/MDB/VLAN entries remained installed in the hardware database of the switchdev port. Also, since commit 0d2cfbd41c4a ("net: bridge: ignore switchdev events for LAG ports which didn't request replay"), DSA introduced a method, based on a const void *ctx, to ensure that two switchdev ports under the same LAG that is a bridge port do not see the same MDB/VLAN entry being replayed twice by the bridge, once for every bridge port that joins the LAG. With so many ordering corner cases being possible, it seems unreasonable to expect a switchdev driver writer to get it right from the first try. Therefore, now that DSA has experimented with the bridge replay helpers for a little bit, we can move the code to the bridge driver where it is more readily available to all switchdev drivers. To convert the switchdev object replay helpers from "pull mode" (where the driver asks for them) to a "push mode" (where the bridge offers them automatically), the biggest problem is that the bridge needs to be aware when a switchdev port joins and leaves, even when the switchdev is only indirectly a bridge port (for example when the bridge port is a LAG upper of the switchdev). Luckily, we already have a hook for that, in the form of the newly introduced switchdev_bridge_port_offload() and switchdev_bridge_port_unoffload() calls. These offer a natural place for hooking the object addition and deletion replays. Extend the above 2 functions with: - pointers to the switchdev atomic notifier (for FDB replays) and the blocking notifier (for MDB and VLAN replays). - the "const void *ctx" argument required for drivers to be able to disambiguate between which port is targeted, when multiple ports are lowers of the same LAG that is a bridge port. Most of the drivers pass NULL to this argument, except the ones that support LAG offload and have the proper context check already in place in the switchdev blocking notifier handler. Also unexport the replay helpers, since nobody except the bridge calls them directly now. Note that: (a) we abuse the terminology slightly, because FDB entries are not "switchdev objects", but we count them as objects nonetheless. With no direct way to prove it, I think they are not modeled as switchdev objects because those can only be installed by the bridge to the hardware (as opposed to FDB entries which can be propagated in the other direction too). This is merely an abuse of terms, FDB entries are replayed too, despite not being objects. (b) the bridge does not attempt to sync port attributes to newly joined ports, just the countable stuff (the objects). The reason for this is simple: no universal and symmetric way to sync and unsync them is known. For example, VLAN filtering: what to do on unsync, disable or leave it enabled? Similarly, STP state, ageing timer, etc etc. What a switchdev port does when it becomes standalone again is not really up to the bridge's competence, and the driver should deal with it. On the other hand, replaying deletions of switchdev objects can be seen a matter of cleanup and therefore be treated by the bridge, hence this patch. We make the replay helpers opt-in for drivers, because they might not bring immediate benefits for them: - nbp_vlan_init() is called _after_ netdev_master_upper_dev_link(), so br_vlan_replay() should not do anything for the new drivers on which we call it. The existing drivers where there was even a slight possibility for there to exist a VLAN on a bridge port before they join it are already guarded against this: mlxsw and prestera deny joining LAG interfaces that are members of a bridge. - br_fdb_replay() should now notify of local FDB entries, but I patched all drivers except DSA to ignore these new entries in commit 2c4eca3ef716 ("net: bridge: switchdev: include local flag in FDB notifications"). Driver authors can lift this restriction as they wish, and when they do, they can also opt into the FDB replay functionality. - br_mdb_replay() should fix a real issue which is described in commit 4f2673b3a2b6 ("net: bridge: add helper to replay port and host-joined mdb entries"). However most drivers do not offload the SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_HOST_MDB to see this issue: only cpsw and am65_cpsw offload this switchdev object, and I don't completely understand the way in which they offload this switchdev object anyway. So I'll leave it up to these drivers' respective maintainers to opt into br_mdb_replay(). So most of the drivers pass NULL notifier blocks for the replay helpers, except: - dpaa2-switch which was already acked/regression-tested with the helpers enabled (and there isn't much of a downside in having them) - ocelot which already had replay logic in "pull" mode - DSA which already had replay logic in "pull" mode An important observation is that the drivers which don't currently request bridge event replays don't even have the switchdev_bridge_port_{offload,unoffload} calls placed in proper places right now. This was done to avoid unnecessary rework for drivers which might never even add support for this. For driver writers who wish to add replay support, this can be used as a tentative placement guide: https://patchwork.kernel.org/project/netdevbpf/patch/20210720134655.892334-11-vladimir.oltean@nxp.com/ Cc: Vadym Kochan <vkochan@marvell.com> Cc: Taras Chornyi <tchornyi@marvell.com> Cc: Ioana Ciornei <ioana.ciornei@nxp.com> Cc: Lars Povlsen <lars.povlsen@microchip.com> Cc: Steen Hegelund <Steen.Hegelund@microchip.com> Cc: UNGLinuxDriver@microchip.com Cc: Claudiu Manoil <claudiu.manoil@nxp.com> Cc: Alexandre Belloni <alexandre.belloni@bootlin.com> Cc: Grygorii Strashko <grygorii.strashko@ti.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Acked-by: Ioana Ciornei <ioana.ciornei@nxp.com> # dpaa2-switch Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-21 19:24:03 +03:00
void dsa_port_pre_lag_leave(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *lag_dev);
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
void dsa_port_lag_leave(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *lag_dev);
net: dsa: propagate extack to .port_vlan_filtering Some drivers can't dynamically change the VLAN filtering option, or impose some restrictions, it would be nice to propagate this info through netlink instead of printing it to a kernel log that might never be read. Also netlink extack includes the module that emitted the message, which means that it's easier to figure out which ones are driver-generated errors as opposed to command misuse. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-13 23:43:19 +03:00
int dsa_port_vlan_filtering(struct dsa_port *dp, bool vlan_filtering,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: provide an option for drivers to always receive bridge VLANs DSA assumes that a bridge which has vlan filtering disabled is not vlan aware, and ignores all vlan configuration. However, the kernel software bridge code allows configuration in this state. This causes the kernel's idea of the bridge vlan state and the hardware state to disagree, so "bridge vlan show" indicates a correct configuration but the hardware lacks all configuration. Even worse, enabling vlan filtering on a DSA bridge immediately blocks all traffic which, given the output of "bridge vlan show", is very confusing. Provide an option that drivers can set to indicate they want to receive vlan configuration even when vlan filtering is disabled. At the very least, this is safe for Marvell DSA bridges, which do not look up ingress traffic in the VTU if the port is in 8021Q disabled state. It is also safe for the Ocelot switch family. Whether this change is suitable for all DSA bridges is not known. Signed-off-by: Russell King <rmk+kernel@armlinux.org.uk> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-05-12 20:20:25 +03:00
bool dsa_port_skip_vlan_configuration(struct dsa_port *dp);
net: switchdev: remove the transaction structure from port attributes Since the introduction of the switchdev API, port attributes were transmitted to drivers for offloading using a two-step transactional model, with a prepare phase that was supposed to catch all errors, and a commit phase that was supposed to never fail. Some classes of failures can never be avoided, like hardware access, or memory allocation. In the latter case, merely attempting to move the memory allocation to the preparation phase makes it impossible to avoid memory leaks, since commit 91cf8eceffc1 ("switchdev: Remove unused transaction item queue") which has removed the unused mechanism of passing on the allocated memory between one phase and another. It is time we admit that separating the preparation from the commit phase is something that is best left for the driver to decide, and not something that should be baked into the API, especially since there are no switchdev callers that depend on this. This patch removes the struct switchdev_trans member from switchdev port attribute notifier structures, and converts drivers to not look at this member. In part, this patch contains a revert of my previous commit 2e554a7a5d8a ("net: dsa: propagate switchdev vlan_filtering prepare phase to drivers"). For the most part, the conversion was trivial except for: - Rocker's world implementation based on Broadcom OF-DPA had an odd implementation of ofdpa_port_attr_bridge_flags_set. The conversion was done mechanically, by pasting the implementation twice, then only keeping the code that would get executed during prepare phase on top, then only keeping the code that gets executed during the commit phase on bottom, then simplifying the resulting code until this was obtained. - DSA's offloading of STP state, bridge flags, VLAN filtering and multicast router could be converted right away. But the ageing time could not, so a shim was introduced and this was left for a further commit. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Acked-by: Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org> Acked-by: Jiri Pirko <jiri@nvidia.com> Reviewed-by: Kurt Kanzenbach <kurt@linutronix.de> # hellcreek Reviewed-by: Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org> # RTL8366RB Reviewed-by: Ido Schimmel <idosch@nvidia.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-09 03:01:50 +03:00
int dsa_port_ageing_time(struct dsa_port *dp, clock_t ageing_clock);
net: dsa: Validate hardware support for MST When joining a bridge where MST is enabled, we validate that the proper offloading support is in place, otherwise we fallback to software bridging. When then mode is changed on a bridge in which we are members, we refuse the change if offloading is not supported. At the moment we only check for configurable learning, but this will be further restricted as we support more MST related switchdev events. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-03-16 18:08:52 +03:00
int dsa_port_mst_enable(struct dsa_port *dp, bool on,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: Pass VLAN MSTI migration notifications to driver Add the usual trampoline functionality from the generic DSA layer down to the drivers for VLAN MSTI migrations. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-03-16 18:08:53 +03:00
int dsa_port_vlan_msti(struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_vlan_msti *msti);
net: dsa: don't emit targeted cross-chip notifiers for MTU change A cross-chip notifier with "targeted_match=true" is one that matches only the local port of the switch that emitted it. In other words, passing through the cross-chip notifier layer serves no purpose. Eliminate this concept by calling directly ds->ops->port_change_mtu instead of emitting a targeted cross-chip notifier. This leaves the DSA_NOTIFIER_MTU event being emitted only for MTU updates on the CPU port, which need to be reflected also across all DSA links. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-04-15 18:46:26 +03:00
int dsa_port_mtu_change(struct dsa_port *dp, int new_mtu);
net: dsa: Remove switchdev dependency from DSA switch notifier chain Currently, the switchdev objects are embedded inside the DSA notifier info. This patch removes this dependency. This is done as a preparation stage before adding support for learning FDB through the switchdev notification chain. Signed-off-by: Arkadi Sharshevsky <arkadis@mellanox.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-08-06 16:15:41 +03:00
int dsa_port_fdb_add(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
int dsa_port_fdb_del(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
net: dsa: install secondary unicast and multicast addresses as host FDB/MDB In preparation of disabling flooding towards the CPU in standalone ports mode, identify the addresses requested by upper interfaces and use the new API for DSA FDB isolation to request the hardware driver to offload these as FDB or MDB objects. The objects belong to the user port's database, and are installed pointing towards the CPU port. Because dev_uc_add()/dev_mc_add() is VLAN-unaware, we offload to the port standalone database addresses with VID 0 (also VLAN-unaware). So this excludes switches with global VLAN filtering from supporting unicast filtering, because there, it is possible for a port of a switch to join a VLAN-aware bridge, and this changes the VLAN awareness of standalone ports, requiring VLAN-aware standalone host FDB entries. For the same reason, hellcreek, which requires VLAN awareness in standalone mode, is also exempted from unicast filtering. We create "standalone" variants of dsa_port_host_fdb_add() and dsa_port_host_mdb_add() (and the _del coresponding functions). We also create a separate work item type for handling deferred standalone host FDB/MDB entries compared to the switchdev one. This is done for the purpose of clarity - the procedure for offloading a bridge FDB entry is different than offloading a standalone one, and the switchdev event work handles only FDBs anyway, not MDBs. Deferral is needed for standalone entries because ndo_set_rx_mode runs in atomic context. We could probably optimize things a little by first queuing up all entries that need to be offloaded, and scheduling the work item just once, but the data structures that we can pass through __dev_uc_sync() and __dev_mc_sync() are limiting (there is nothing like a void *priv), so we'd have to keep the list of queued events somewhere in struct dsa_switch, and possibly a lock for it. Too complicated for now. Adding the address to the master is handled by dev_uc_sync(), adding it to the hardware is handled by __dev_uc_sync(). So this is the reason why dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add() does not call dev_uc_add(). Not that it had the rtnl_mutex anyway - ndo_set_rx_mode has it, but is atomic. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:10 +03:00
int dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add(struct dsa_port *dp,
const unsigned char *addr, u16 vid);
int dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_del(struct dsa_port *dp,
const unsigned char *addr, u16 vid);
net: dsa: rename the host FDB and MDB methods to contain the "bridge" namespace We are preparing to add API in port.c that adds FDB and MDB entries that correspond to the port's standalone database. Rename the existing methods to make it clear that the FDB and MDB entries offloaded come from the bridge database. Since the function names lengthen in dsa_slave_switchdev_event_work(), we place "addr" and "vid" in temporary variables, to shorten those. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:09 +03:00
int dsa_port_bridge_host_fdb_add(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
int dsa_port_bridge_host_fdb_del(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
net: dsa: support FDB events on offloaded LAG interfaces This change introduces support for installing static FDB entries towards a bridge port that is a LAG of multiple DSA switch ports, as well as support for filtering towards the CPU local FDB entries emitted for LAG interfaces that are bridge ports. Conceptually, host addresses on LAG ports are identical to what we do for plain bridge ports. Whereas FDB entries _towards_ a LAG can't simply be replicated towards all member ports like we do for multicast, or VLAN. Instead we need new driver API. Hardware usually considers a LAG to be a "logical port", and sets the entire LAG as the forwarding destination. The physical egress port selection within the LAG is made by hashing policy, as usual. To represent the logical port corresponding to the LAG, we pass by value a copy of the dsa_lag structure to all switches in the tree that have at least one port in that LAG. To illustrate why a refcounted list of FDB entries is needed in struct dsa_lag, it is enough to say that: - a LAG may be a bridge port and may therefore receive FDB events even while it isn't yet offloaded by any DSA interface - DSA interfaces may be removed from a LAG while that is a bridge port; we don't want FDB entries lingering around, but we don't want to remove entries that are still in use, either For all the cases below to work, the idea is to always keep an FDB entry on a LAG with a reference count equal to the DSA member ports. So: - if a port joins a LAG, it requests the bridge to replay the FDB, and the FDB entries get created, or their refcount gets bumped by one - if a port leaves a LAG, the FDB replay deletes or decrements refcount by one - if an FDB is installed towards a LAG with ports already present, that entry is created (if it doesn't exist) and its refcount is bumped by the amount of ports already present in the LAG echo "Adding FDB entry to bond with existing ports" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 echo "Adding FDB entry to empty bond, then removing ports one by one" ip link del bond0 ip link add bond0 type bond mode 802.3ad ip link del br0 ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set bond0 master br0 bridge fdb add dev bond0 00:01:02:03:04:05 master static ip link set swp1 down && ip link set swp1 master bond0 && ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 down && ip link set swp2 master bond0 && ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp1 nomaster ip link set swp2 nomaster ip link del br0 ip link del bond0 Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:53 +03:00
int dsa_port_lag_fdb_add(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
int dsa_port_lag_fdb_del(struct dsa_port *dp, const unsigned char *addr,
u16 vid);
net: dsa: add port fdb dump Dumping a DSA port's FDB entries is not specific to a DSA slave, so add a dsa_port_fdb_dump function, similarly to dsa_port_fdb_add and dsa_port_fdb_del. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-09-21 02:32:14 +03:00
int dsa_port_fdb_dump(struct dsa_port *dp, dsa_fdb_dump_cb_t *cb, void *data);
net: dsa: add more const attributes The notify mechanism does not need to modify the port it is notifying. So make the parameter const. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-11-10 01:11:01 +03:00
int dsa_port_mdb_add(const struct dsa_port *dp,
net: switchdev: remove the transaction structure from port object notifiers Since the introduction of the switchdev API, port objects were transmitted to drivers for offloading using a two-step transactional model, with a prepare phase that was supposed to catch all errors, and a commit phase that was supposed to never fail. Some classes of failures can never be avoided, like hardware access, or memory allocation. In the latter case, merely attempting to move the memory allocation to the preparation phase makes it impossible to avoid memory leaks, since commit 91cf8eceffc1 ("switchdev: Remove unused transaction item queue") which has removed the unused mechanism of passing on the allocated memory between one phase and another. It is time we admit that separating the preparation from the commit phase is something that is best left for the driver to decide, and not something that should be baked into the API, especially since there are no switchdev callers that depend on this. This patch removes the struct switchdev_trans member from switchdev port object notifier structures, and converts drivers to not look at this member. Where driver conversion is trivial (like in the case of the Marvell Prestera driver, NXP DPAA2 switch, TI CPSW, and Rocker drivers), it is done in this patch. Where driver conversion needs more attention (DSA, Mellanox Spectrum), the conversion is left for subsequent patches and here we only fake the prepare/commit phases at a lower level, just not in the switchdev notifier itself. Where the code has a natural structure that is best left alone as a preparation and a commit phase (as in the case of the Ocelot switch), that structure is left in place, just made to not depend upon the switchdev transactional model. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Acked-by: Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@linaro.org> Acked-by: Jiri Pirko <jiri@nvidia.com> Reviewed-by: Ido Schimmel <idosch@nvidia.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-09 03:01:48 +03:00
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
net: dsa: add more const attributes The notify mechanism does not need to modify the port it is notifying. So make the parameter const. Signed-off-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-11-10 01:11:01 +03:00
int dsa_port_mdb_del(const struct dsa_port *dp,
net: dsa: move MDB handlers Move the DSA port code which handles MDB objects in port.c, where it belongs. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:49 +03:00
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
net: dsa: install secondary unicast and multicast addresses as host FDB/MDB In preparation of disabling flooding towards the CPU in standalone ports mode, identify the addresses requested by upper interfaces and use the new API for DSA FDB isolation to request the hardware driver to offload these as FDB or MDB objects. The objects belong to the user port's database, and are installed pointing towards the CPU port. Because dev_uc_add()/dev_mc_add() is VLAN-unaware, we offload to the port standalone database addresses with VID 0 (also VLAN-unaware). So this excludes switches with global VLAN filtering from supporting unicast filtering, because there, it is possible for a port of a switch to join a VLAN-aware bridge, and this changes the VLAN awareness of standalone ports, requiring VLAN-aware standalone host FDB entries. For the same reason, hellcreek, which requires VLAN awareness in standalone mode, is also exempted from unicast filtering. We create "standalone" variants of dsa_port_host_fdb_add() and dsa_port_host_mdb_add() (and the _del coresponding functions). We also create a separate work item type for handling deferred standalone host FDB/MDB entries compared to the switchdev one. This is done for the purpose of clarity - the procedure for offloading a bridge FDB entry is different than offloading a standalone one, and the switchdev event work handles only FDBs anyway, not MDBs. Deferral is needed for standalone entries because ndo_set_rx_mode runs in atomic context. We could probably optimize things a little by first queuing up all entries that need to be offloaded, and scheduling the work item just once, but the data structures that we can pass through __dev_uc_sync() and __dev_mc_sync() are limiting (there is nothing like a void *priv), so we'd have to keep the list of queued events somewhere in struct dsa_switch, and possibly a lock for it. Too complicated for now. Adding the address to the master is handled by dev_uc_sync(), adding it to the hardware is handled by __dev_uc_sync(). So this is the reason why dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add() does not call dev_uc_add(). Not that it had the rtnl_mutex anyway - ndo_set_rx_mode has it, but is atomic. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:10 +03:00
int dsa_port_standalone_host_mdb_add(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
int dsa_port_standalone_host_mdb_del(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
net: dsa: rename the host FDB and MDB methods to contain the "bridge" namespace We are preparing to add API in port.c that adds FDB and MDB entries that correspond to the port's standalone database. Rename the existing methods to make it clear that the FDB and MDB entries offloaded come from the bridge database. Since the function names lengthen in dsa_slave_switchdev_event_work(), we place "addr" and "vid" in temporary variables, to shorten those. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:09 +03:00
int dsa_port_bridge_host_mdb_add(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
int dsa_port_bridge_host_mdb_del(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_mdb *mdb);
net: switchdev: pass flags and mask to both {PRE_,}BRIDGE_FLAGS attributes This switchdev attribute offers a counterproductive API for a driver writer, because although br_switchdev_set_port_flag gets passed a "flags" and a "mask", those are passed piecemeal to the driver, so while the PRE_BRIDGE_FLAGS listener knows what changed because it has the "mask", the BRIDGE_FLAGS listener doesn't, because it only has the final value. But certain drivers can offload only certain combinations of settings, like for example they cannot change unicast flooding independently of multicast flooding - they must be both on or both off. The way the information is passed to switchdev makes drivers not expressive enough, and unable to reject this request ahead of time, in the PRE_BRIDGE_FLAGS notifier, so they are forced to reject it during the deferred BRIDGE_FLAGS attribute, where the rejection is currently ignored. This patch also changes drivers to make use of the "mask" field for edge detection when possible. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Grygorii Strashko <grygorii.strashko@ti.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-12 18:15:55 +03:00
int dsa_port_pre_bridge_flags(const struct dsa_port *dp,
net: dsa: act as passthrough for bridge port flags There are multiple ways in which a PORT_BRIDGE_FLAGS attribute can be expressed by the bridge through switchdev, and not all of them can be emulated by DSA mid-layer API at the same time. One possible configuration is when the bridge offloads the port flags using a mask that has a single bit set - therefore only one feature should change. However, DSA currently groups together unicast and multicast flooding in the .port_egress_floods method, which limits our options when we try to add support for turning off broadcast flooding: do we extend .port_egress_floods with a third parameter which b53 and mv88e6xxx will ignore? But that means that the DSA layer, which currently implements the PRE_BRIDGE_FLAGS attribute all by itself, will see that .port_egress_floods is implemented, and will report that all 3 types of flooding are supported - not necessarily true. Another configuration is when the user specifies more than one flag at the same time, in the same netlink message. If we were to create one individual function per offloadable bridge port flag, we would limit the expressiveness of the switch driver of refusing certain combinations of flag values. For example, a switch may not have an explicit knob for flooding of unknown multicast, just for flooding in general. In that case, the only correct thing to do is to allow changes to BR_FLOOD and BR_MCAST_FLOOD in tandem, and never allow mismatched values. But having a separate .port_set_unicast_flood and .port_set_multicast_flood would not allow the driver to possibly reject that. Also, DSA doesn't consider it necessary to inform the driver that a SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_BRIDGE_MROUTER attribute was offloaded, because it just calls .port_egress_floods for the CPU port. When we'll add support for the plain SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_PORT_MROUTER, that will become a real problem because the flood settings will need to be held statefully in the DSA middle layer, otherwise changing the mrouter port attribute will impact the flooding attribute. And that's _assuming_ that the underlying hardware doesn't have anything else to do when a multicast router attaches to a port than flood unknown traffic to it. If it does, there will need to be a dedicated .port_set_mrouter anyway. So we need to let the DSA drivers see the exact form that the bridge passes this switchdev attribute in, otherwise we are standing in the way. Therefore we also need to use this form of language when communicating to the driver that it needs to configure its initial (before bridge join) and final (after bridge leave) port flags. The b53 and mv88e6xxx drivers are converted to the passthrough API and their implementation of .port_egress_floods is split into two: a function that configures unicast flooding and another for multicast. The mv88e6xxx implementation is quite hairy, and it turns out that the implementations of unknown unicast flooding are actually the same for 6185 and for 6352: behind the confusing names actually lie two individual bits: NO_UNKNOWN_MC -> FLOOD_UC = 0x4 = BIT(2) NO_UNKNOWN_UC -> FLOOD_MC = 0x8 = BIT(3) so there was no reason to entangle them in the first place. Whereas the 6185 writes to MV88E6185_PORT_CTL0_FORWARD_UNKNOWN of PORT_CTL0, which has the exact same bit index. I have left the implementations separate though, for the only reason that the names are different enough to confuse me, since I am not able to double-check with a user manual. The multicast flooding setting for 6185 is in a different register than for 6352 though. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-12 18:15:56 +03:00
struct switchdev_brport_flags flags,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: centralize fast ageing when address learning is turned off Currently DSA leaves it down to device drivers to fast age the FDB on a port when address learning is disabled on it. There are 2 reasons for doing that in the first place: - when address learning is disabled by user space, through IFLA_BRPORT_LEARNING or the brport_attr_learning sysfs, what user space typically wants to achieve is to operate in a mode with no dynamic FDB entry on that port. But if the port is already up, some addresses might have been already learned on it, and it seems silly to wait for 5 minutes for them to expire until something useful can be done. - when a port leaves a bridge and becomes standalone, DSA turns off address learning on it. This also has the nice side effect of flushing the dynamically learned bridge FDB entries on it, which is a good idea because standalone ports should not have bridge FDB entries on them. We let drivers manage fast ageing under this condition because if DSA were to do it, it would need to track each port's learning state, and act upon the transition, which it currently doesn't. But there are 2 reasons why doing it is better after all: - drivers might get it wrong and not do it (see b53_port_set_learning) - we would like to flush the dynamic entries from the software bridge too, and letting drivers do that would be another pain point So track the port learning state and trigger a fast age process automatically within DSA. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-08 17:35:23 +03:00
int dsa_port_bridge_flags(struct dsa_port *dp,
net: dsa: act as passthrough for bridge port flags There are multiple ways in which a PORT_BRIDGE_FLAGS attribute can be expressed by the bridge through switchdev, and not all of them can be emulated by DSA mid-layer API at the same time. One possible configuration is when the bridge offloads the port flags using a mask that has a single bit set - therefore only one feature should change. However, DSA currently groups together unicast and multicast flooding in the .port_egress_floods method, which limits our options when we try to add support for turning off broadcast flooding: do we extend .port_egress_floods with a third parameter which b53 and mv88e6xxx will ignore? But that means that the DSA layer, which currently implements the PRE_BRIDGE_FLAGS attribute all by itself, will see that .port_egress_floods is implemented, and will report that all 3 types of flooding are supported - not necessarily true. Another configuration is when the user specifies more than one flag at the same time, in the same netlink message. If we were to create one individual function per offloadable bridge port flag, we would limit the expressiveness of the switch driver of refusing certain combinations of flag values. For example, a switch may not have an explicit knob for flooding of unknown multicast, just for flooding in general. In that case, the only correct thing to do is to allow changes to BR_FLOOD and BR_MCAST_FLOOD in tandem, and never allow mismatched values. But having a separate .port_set_unicast_flood and .port_set_multicast_flood would not allow the driver to possibly reject that. Also, DSA doesn't consider it necessary to inform the driver that a SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_BRIDGE_MROUTER attribute was offloaded, because it just calls .port_egress_floods for the CPU port. When we'll add support for the plain SWITCHDEV_ATTR_ID_PORT_MROUTER, that will become a real problem because the flood settings will need to be held statefully in the DSA middle layer, otherwise changing the mrouter port attribute will impact the flooding attribute. And that's _assuming_ that the underlying hardware doesn't have anything else to do when a multicast router attaches to a port than flood unknown traffic to it. If it does, there will need to be a dedicated .port_set_mrouter anyway. So we need to let the DSA drivers see the exact form that the bridge passes this switchdev attribute in, otherwise we are standing in the way. Therefore we also need to use this form of language when communicating to the driver that it needs to configure its initial (before bridge join) and final (after bridge leave) port flags. The b53 and mv88e6xxx drivers are converted to the passthrough API and their implementation of .port_egress_floods is split into two: a function that configures unicast flooding and another for multicast. The mv88e6xxx implementation is quite hairy, and it turns out that the implementations of unknown unicast flooding are actually the same for 6185 and for 6352: behind the confusing names actually lie two individual bits: NO_UNKNOWN_MC -> FLOOD_UC = 0x4 = BIT(2) NO_UNKNOWN_UC -> FLOOD_MC = 0x8 = BIT(3) so there was no reason to entangle them in the first place. Whereas the 6185 writes to MV88E6185_PORT_CTL0_FORWARD_UNKNOWN of PORT_CTL0, which has the exact same bit index. I have left the implementations separate though, for the only reason that the names are different enough to confuse me, since I am not able to double-check with a user manual. The multicast flooding setting for 6185 is in a different register than for 6352 though. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-12 18:15:56 +03:00
struct switchdev_brport_flags flags,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: move VLAN handlers Move the DSA port code which handles VLAN objects in port.c, where it belongs. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:50 +03:00
int dsa_port_vlan_add(struct dsa_port *dp,
net: dsa: propagate extack to .port_vlan_add Allow drivers to communicate their restrictions to user space directly, instead of printing to the kernel log. Where the conversion would have been lossy and things like VLAN ID could no longer be conveyed (due to the lack of support for printf format specifier in netlink extack), I chose to keep the messages in full form to the kernel log only, and leave it up to individual driver maintainers to move more messages to extack. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-13 23:43:18 +03:00
const struct switchdev_obj_port_vlan *vlan,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: move VLAN handlers Move the DSA port code which handles VLAN objects in port.c, where it belongs. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-05-20 00:00:50 +03:00
int dsa_port_vlan_del(struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_vlan *vlan);
net: dsa: add explicit support for host bridge VLANs Currently, DSA programs VLANs on shared (DSA and CPU) ports each time it does so on user ports. This is good for basic functionality but has several limitations: - the VLAN group which must reach the CPU may be radically different from the VLAN group that must be autonomously forwarded by the switch. In other words, the admin may want to isolate noisy stations and avoid traffic from them going to the control processor of the switch, where it would just waste useless cycles. The bridge already supports independent control of VLAN groups on bridge ports and on the bridge itself, and when VLAN-aware, it will drop packets in software anyway if their VID isn't added as a 'self' entry towards the bridge device. - Replaying host FDB entries may depend, for some drivers like mv88e6xxx, on replaying the host VLANs as well. The 2 VLAN groups are approximately the same in most regular cases, but there are corner cases when timing matters, and DSA's approximation of replicating VLANs on shared ports simply does not work. - If a user makes the bridge (implicitly the CPU port) join a VLAN by accident, there is no way for the CPU port to isolate itself from that noisy VLAN except by rebooting the system. This is because for each VLAN added on a user port, DSA will add it on shared ports too, but for each VLAN deletion on a user port, it will remain installed on shared ports, since DSA has no good indication of whether the VLAN is still in use or not. Now that the bridge driver emits well-balanced SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_PORT_VLAN addition and removal events, DSA has a simple and straightforward task of separating the bridge port VLANs (these have an orig_dev which is a DSA slave interface, or a LAG interface) from the host VLANs (these have an orig_dev which is a bridge interface), and to keep a simple reference count of each VID on each shared port. Forwarding VLANs must be installed on the bridge ports and on all DSA ports interconnecting them. We don't have a good view of the exact topology, so we simply install forwarding VLANs on all DSA ports, which is what has been done until now. Host VLANs must be installed primarily on the dedicated CPU port of each bridge port. More subtly, they must also be installed on upstream-facing and downstream-facing DSA ports that are connecting the bridge ports and the CPU. This ensures that the mv88e6xxx's problem (VID of host FDB entry may be absent from VTU) is still addressed even if that switch is in a cross-chip setup, and it has no local CPU port. Therefore: - user ports contain only bridge port (forwarding) VLANs, and no refcounting is necessary - DSA ports contain both forwarding and host VLANs. Refcounting is necessary among these 2 types. - CPU ports contain only host VLANs. Refcounting is also necessary. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-15 20:02:17 +03:00
int dsa_port_host_vlan_add(struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_vlan *vlan,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
int dsa_port_host_vlan_del(struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_port_vlan *vlan);
net: dsa: add MRP support Add support for offloading MRP in HW. Currently implement the switchdev calls 'SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_MRP', 'SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_RING_ROLE_MRP', to allow to create MRP instances and to set the role of these instances. Add DSA_NOTIFIER_MRP_ADD/DEL and DSA_NOTIFIER_MRP_ADD/DEL_RING_ROLE which calls to .port_mrp_add/del and .port_mrp_add/del_ring_role in the DSA driver for the switch. Signed-off-by: Horatiu Vultur <horatiu.vultur@microchip.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-17 00:42:04 +03:00
int dsa_port_mrp_add(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_mrp *mrp);
int dsa_port_mrp_del(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_mrp *mrp);
int dsa_port_mrp_add_ring_role(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_ring_role_mrp *mrp);
int dsa_port_mrp_del_ring_role(const struct dsa_port *dp,
const struct switchdev_obj_ring_role_mrp *mrp);
net: dsa: consolidate phylink creation The code in port.c and slave.c creating the phylink instance is very similar - let's consolidate this into a single function. Signed-off-by: Russell King (Oracle) <rmk+kernel@armlinux.org.uk> Reviewed-by: Marek Behún <kabel@kernel.org> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-11-30 16:09:55 +03:00
int dsa_port_phylink_create(struct dsa_port *dp);
net: dsa: rename dsa_port_link_{,un}register_of There is a subset of functions that applies only to shared (DSA and CPU) ports, yet this is difficult to comprehend by looking at their code alone. These are dsa_port_link_register_of(), dsa_port_link_unregister_of(), and the functions that only these 2 call. Rename this class of functions to dsa_shared_port_* to make this fact more evident, even if this goes against the apparent convention that function names in port.c must start with dsa_port_. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-08-18 14:54:59 +03:00
int dsa_shared_port_link_register_of(struct dsa_port *dp);
void dsa_shared_port_link_unregister_of(struct dsa_port *dp);
net: dsa: add support for offloading HSR Add support for offloading of HSR/PRP (IEC 62439-3) tag insertion tag removal, duplicate generation and forwarding on DSA switches. Add DSA_NOTIFIER_HSR_JOIN and DSA_NOTIFIER_HSR_LEAVE which trigger calls to .port_hsr_join and .port_hsr_leave in the DSA driver for the switch. The DSA switch driver should then set netdev feature flags for the HSR/PRP operation that it offloads. NETIF_F_HW_HSR_TAG_INS NETIF_F_HW_HSR_TAG_RM NETIF_F_HW_HSR_FWD NETIF_F_HW_HSR_DUP Signed-off-by: George McCollister <george.mccollister@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-02-10 04:02:12 +03:00
int dsa_port_hsr_join(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *hsr);
void dsa_port_hsr_leave(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *hsr);
net: dsa: tag_8021q: don't broadcast during setup/teardown Currently, on my board with multiple sja1105 switches in disjoint trees described in commit f66a6a69f97a ("net: dsa: permit cross-chip bridging between all trees in the system"), rebooting the board triggers the following benign warnings: [ 12.345566] sja1105 spi2.0: port 0 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 1088 deletion: -ENOENT [ 12.353804] sja1105 spi2.0: port 0 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 2112 deletion: -ENOENT [ 12.362019] sja1105 spi2.0: port 1 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 1089 deletion: -ENOENT [ 12.370246] sja1105 spi2.0: port 1 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 2113 deletion: -ENOENT [ 12.378466] sja1105 spi2.0: port 2 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 1090 deletion: -ENOENT [ 12.386683] sja1105 spi2.0: port 2 failed to notify tag_8021q VLAN 2114 deletion: -ENOENT Basically switch 1 calls dsa_tag_8021q_unregister, and switch 1's TX and RX VLANs cannot be found on switch 2's CPU port. But why would switch 2 even attempt to delete switch 1's TX and RX tag_8021q VLANs from its CPU port? Well, because we use dsa_broadcast, and it is supposed that it had added those VLANs in the first place (because in dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_match, all CPU ports match regardless of their tree index or switch index). The two trees probe asynchronously, and when switch 1 probed, it called dsa_broadcast which did not notify the tree of switch 2, because that didn't probe yet. But during unbind, switch 2's tree _is_ probed, so it _is_ notified of the deletion. Before jumping to introduce a synchronization mechanism between the probing across disjoint switch trees, let's take a step back and see whether we _need_ to do that in the first place. The RX and TX VLANs of switch 1 would be needed on switch 2's CPU port only if switch 1 and 2 were part of a cross-chip bridge. And dsa_tag_8021q_bridge_join takes care precisely of that (but if probing was synchronous, the bridge_join would just end up bumping the VLANs' refcount, because they are already installed by the setup path). Since by the time the ports are bridged, all DSA trees are already set up, and we don't need the tag_8021q VLANs of one switch installed on the other switches during probe time, the answer is that we don't need to fix the synchronization issue. So make the setup and teardown code paths call dsa_port_notify, which notifies only the local tree, and the bridge code paths call dsa_broadcast, which let the other trees know as well. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-11 16:46:06 +03:00
int dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_add(struct dsa_port *dp, u16 vid, bool broadcast);
void dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_del(struct dsa_port *dp, u16 vid, bool broadcast);
net: dsa: felix: manage host flooding using a specific driver callback At the time - commit 7569459a52c9 ("net: dsa: manage flooding on the CPU ports") - not introducing a dedicated switch callback for host flooding made sense, because for the only user, the felix driver, there was nothing different to do for the CPU port than set the flood flags on the CPU port just like on any other bridge port. There are 2 reasons why this approach is not good enough, however. (1) Other drivers, like sja1105, support configuring flooding as a function of {ingress port, egress port}, whereas the DSA ->port_bridge_flags() function only operates on an egress port. So with that driver we'd have useless host flooding from user ports which don't need it. (2) Even with the felix driver, support for multiple CPU ports makes it difficult to piggyback on ->port_bridge_flags(). The way in which the felix driver is going to support host-filtered addresses with multiple CPU ports is that it will direct these addresses towards both CPU ports (in a sort of multicast fashion), then restrict the forwarding to only one of the two using the forwarding masks. Consequently, flooding will also be enabled towards both CPU ports. However, ->port_bridge_flags() gets passed the index of a single CPU port, and that leaves the flood settings out of sync between the 2 CPU ports. This is to say, it's better to have a specific driver method for host flooding, which takes the user port as argument. This solves problem (1) by allowing the driver to do different things for different user ports, and problem (2) by abstracting the operation and letting the driver do whatever, rather than explicitly making the DSA core point to the CPU port it thinks needs to be touched. This new method also creates a problem, which is that cross-chip setups are not handled. However I don't have hardware right now where I can test what is the proper thing to do, and there isn't hardware compatible with multi-switch trees that supports host flooding. So it remains a problem to be tackled in the future. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-05-11 12:50:17 +03:00
void dsa_port_set_host_flood(struct dsa_port *dp, bool uc, bool mc);
net: dsa: allow the DSA master to be seen and changed through rtnetlink Some DSA switches have multiple CPU ports, which can be used to improve CPU termination throughput, but DSA, through dsa_tree_setup_cpu_ports(), sets up only the first one, leading to suboptimal use of hardware. The desire is to not change the default configuration but to permit the user to create a dynamic mapping between individual user ports and the CPU port that they are served by, configurable through rtnetlink. It is also intended to permit load balancing between CPU ports, and in that case, the foreseen model is for the DSA master to be a bonding interface whose lowers are the physical DSA masters. To that end, we create a struct rtnl_link_ops for DSA user ports with the "dsa" kind. We expose the IFLA_DSA_MASTER link attribute that contains the ifindex of the newly desired DSA master. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:59 +03:00
int dsa_port_change_master(struct dsa_port *dp, struct net_device *master,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: move fixed link registration helpers The new bindings (dsa2.c) and the old bindings (legacy.c) share two helpers dsa_cpu_dsa_setup and dsa_cpu_dsa_destroy, used to register or deregister a fixed PHY if a given port has a corresponding device node. Unclutter the code by moving them into two new port.c helpers, dsa_port_fixed_link_register_of and dsa_port_fixed_link_(un)register_of. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-26 17:50:07 +03:00
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
/* slave.c */
dsa: Split ops up, and avoid assigning tag_protocol and receive separately This change addresses several issues. First, it was possible to set tag_protocol without setting the ops pointer. To correct that I have reordered things so that rcv is now populated before we set tag_protocol. Second, it didn't make much sense to keep setting the device ops each time a new slave was registered. So by moving the receive portion out into root switch initialization that issue should be addressed. Third, I wanted to avoid sending tags if the rcv pointer was not registered so I changed the tag check to verify if the rcv function pointer is set on the root tree. If it is then we start sending DSA tagged frames. Finally I split the device ops pointer in the structures into two spots. I placed the rcv function pointer in the root switch since this makes it easiest to access from there, and I placed the xmit function pointer in the slave for the same reason. Signed-off-by: Alexander Duyck <alexander.h.duyck@intel.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2014-09-15 21:00:19 +04:00
extern const struct dsa_device_ops notag_netdev_ops;
net: dsa: sync up switchdev objects and port attributes when joining the bridge If we join an already-created bridge port, such as a bond master interface, then we can miss the initial switchdev notifications emitted by the bridge for this port, while it wasn't offloaded by anybody. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-03-23 02:51:50 +03:00
extern struct notifier_block dsa_slave_switchdev_notifier;
extern struct notifier_block dsa_slave_switchdev_blocking_notifier;
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
void dsa_slave_mii_bus_init(struct dsa_switch *ds);
net: dsa: remove name arg from slave create Now that slave dsa_port always have their name set, there is no need to pass it to dsa_slave_create() anymore. Remove this argument. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-27 22:55:19 +03:00
int dsa_slave_create(struct dsa_port *dp);
net: dsa: move dsa slave destroy code to slave.c Move dsa slave dedicated code from dsa_switch_destroy to a new dsa_slave_destroy function in slave.c. Add the netif_carrier_off and phy_disconnect calls in order to correctly cleanup the netdev state and PHY state machine. Signed-off-by: Frode Isaksen <fisaksen@baylibre.com> Signed-off-by: Neil Armstrong <narmstrong@baylibre.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2015-12-07 15:57:35 +03:00
void dsa_slave_destroy(struct net_device *slave_dev);
net: dsa: allow switch drivers to implement suspend/resume hooks Add an abstraction layer to suspend/resume switch devices, doing the following split: - suspend/resume the slave network devices and their corresponding PHY devices - suspend/resume the switch hardware using switch driver callbacks Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2014-09-19 04:31:22 +04:00
int dsa_slave_suspend(struct net_device *slave_dev);
int dsa_slave_resume(struct net_device *slave_dev);
net: dsa: move netdevice notifier registration Move the netdevice notifier block register code in slave.c and provide helpers for dsa.c to register and unregister it. At the same time, check for errors since (un)register_netdevice_notifier may fail. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-02-03 21:20:16 +03:00
int dsa_slave_register_notifier(void);
void dsa_slave_unregister_notifier(void);
net: dsa: allow the DSA master to be seen and changed through rtnetlink Some DSA switches have multiple CPU ports, which can be used to improve CPU termination throughput, but DSA, through dsa_tree_setup_cpu_ports(), sets up only the first one, leading to suboptimal use of hardware. The desire is to not change the default configuration but to permit the user to create a dynamic mapping between individual user ports and the CPU port that they are served by, configurable through rtnetlink. It is also intended to permit load balancing between CPU ports, and in that case, the foreseen model is for the DSA master to be a bonding interface whose lowers are the physical DSA masters. To that end, we create a struct rtnl_link_ops for DSA user ports with the "dsa" kind. We expose the IFLA_DSA_MASTER link attribute that contains the ifindex of the newly desired DSA master. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:59 +03:00
void dsa_slave_sync_ha(struct net_device *dev);
void dsa_slave_unsync_ha(struct net_device *dev);
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
void dsa_slave_setup_tagger(struct net_device *slave);
int dsa_slave_change_mtu(struct net_device *dev, int new_mtu);
net: dsa: allow the DSA master to be seen and changed through rtnetlink Some DSA switches have multiple CPU ports, which can be used to improve CPU termination throughput, but DSA, through dsa_tree_setup_cpu_ports(), sets up only the first one, leading to suboptimal use of hardware. The desire is to not change the default configuration but to permit the user to create a dynamic mapping between individual user ports and the CPU port that they are served by, configurable through rtnetlink. It is also intended to permit load balancing between CPU ports, and in that case, the foreseen model is for the DSA master to be a bonding interface whose lowers are the physical DSA masters. To that end, we create a struct rtnl_link_ops for DSA user ports with the "dsa" kind. We expose the IFLA_DSA_MASTER link attribute that contains the ifindex of the newly desired DSA master. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:59 +03:00
int dsa_slave_change_master(struct net_device *dev, struct net_device *master,
struct netlink_ext_ack *extack);
net: dsa: don't advertise 'rx-vlan-filter' when not needed There have been multiple independent reports about dsa_slave_vlan_rx_add_vid being called (and consequently calling the drivers' .port_vlan_add) when it isn't needed, and sometimes (not always) causing problems in the process. Case 1: mv88e6xxx_port_vlan_prepare is stubborn and only accepts VLANs on bridged ports. That is understandably so, because standalone mv88e6xxx ports are VLAN-unaware, and VTU entries are said to be a scarce resource. Otherwise said, the following fails lamentably on mv88e6xxx: ip link add br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 ip link set lan3 master br0 ip link add link lan10 name lan10.1 type vlan id 1 [485256.724147] mv88e6085 d0032004.mdio-mii:12: p10: hw VLAN 1 already used by port 3 in br0 RTNETLINK answers: Operation not supported This has become a worse issue since commit 9b236d2a69da ("net: dsa: Advertise the VLAN offload netdev ability only if switch supports it"). Up to that point, the driver was returning -EOPNOTSUPP and DSA was reconverting that error to 0, making the 8021q upper think all is ok (but obviously the error message was there even prior to this change). After that change the -EOPNOTSUPP is propagated to vlan_vid_add, and it is a hard error. Case 2: Ports that don't offload the Linux bridge (have a dp->bridge_dev = NULL because they don't implement .port_bridge_{join,leave}). Understandably, a standalone port should not offload VLANs either, it should remain VLAN unaware and any VLAN should be a software VLAN (as long as the hardware is not quirky, that is). In fact, dsa_slave_port_obj_add does do the right thing and rejects switchdev VLAN objects coming from the bridge when that bridge is not offloaded: case SWITCHDEV_OBJ_ID_PORT_VLAN: if (!dsa_port_offloads_bridge_port(dp, obj->orig_dev)) return -EOPNOTSUPP; err = dsa_slave_vlan_add(dev, obj, extack); But it seems that the bridge is able to trick us. The __vlan_vid_add from br_vlan.c has: /* Try switchdev op first. In case it is not supported, fallback to * 8021q add. */ err = br_switchdev_port_vlan_add(dev, v->vid, flags, extack); if (err == -EOPNOTSUPP) return vlan_vid_add(dev, br->vlan_proto, v->vid); So it says "no, no, you need this VLAN in your life!". And we, naive as we are, say "oh, this comes from the vlan_vid_add code path, it must be an 8021q upper, sure, I'll take that". And we end up with that bridge VLAN installed on our port anyway. But this time, it has the wrong flags: if the bridge was trying to install VLAN 1 as a pvid/untagged VLAN, failed via switchdev, retried via vlan_vid_add, we have this comment: /* This API only allows programming tagged, non-PVID VIDs */ So what we do makes absolutely no sense. Backtracing a bit, we see the common pattern. We allow the network stack to think that our standalone ports are VLAN-aware, but they aren't, for the vast majority of switches. The quirky ones should not dictate the norm. The dsa_slave_vlan_rx_add_vid and dsa_slave_vlan_rx_kill_vid methods exist for drivers that need the 'rx-vlan-filter: on' feature in ethtool -k, which can be due to any of the following reasons: 1. vlan_filtering_is_global = true, and some ports are under a VLAN-aware bridge while others are standalone, and the standalone ports would otherwise drop VLAN-tagged traffic. This is described in commit 061f6a505ac3 ("net: dsa: Add ndo_vlan_rx_{add, kill}_vid implementation"). 2. the ports that are under a VLAN-aware bridge should also set this feature, for 8021q uppers having a VID not claimed by the bridge. In this case, the driver will essentially not even know that the VID is coming from the 8021q layer and not the bridge. 3. Hellcreek. This driver needs it because in standalone mode, it uses unique VLANs per port to ensure separation. For separation of untagged traffic, it uses different PVIDs for each port, and for separation of VLAN-tagged traffic, it never accepts 8021q uppers with the same vid on two ports. If a driver does not fall under any of the above 3 categories, there is no reason why it should advertise the 'rx-vlan-filter' feature, therefore no reason why it should offload the VLANs added through vlan_vid_add. This commit fixes the problem by removing the 'rx-vlan-filter' feature from the slave devices when they operate in standalone mode, and when they offload a VLAN-unaware bridge. The way it works is that vlan_vid_add will now stop its processing here: vlan_add_rx_filter_info: if (!vlan_hw_filter_capable(dev, proto)) return 0; So the VLAN will still be saved in the interface's VLAN RX filtering list, but because it does not declare VLAN filtering in its features, the 8021q module will return zero without committing that VLAN to hardware. This gives the drivers what they want, since it keeps the 8021q VLANs away from the VLAN table until VLAN awareness is enabled (point at which the ports are no longer standalone, hence in the mv88e6xxx case, the check in mv88e6xxx_port_vlan_prepare passes). Since the issue predates the existence of the hellcreek driver, case 3 will be dealt with in a separate patch. The main change that this patch makes is to no longer set NETIF_F_HW_VLAN_CTAG_FILTER unconditionally, but toggle it dynamically (for most switches, never). The second part of the patch addresses an issue that the first part introduces: because the 'rx-vlan-filter' feature is now dynamically toggled, and our .ndo_vlan_rx_add_vid does not get called when 'rx-vlan-filter' is off, we need to avoid bugs such as the following by replaying the VLANs from 8021q uppers every time we enable VLAN filtering: ip link add link lan0 name lan0.100 type vlan id 100 ip addr add 192.168.100.1/24 dev lan0.100 ping 192.168.100.2 # should work ip link add br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set lan0 master br0 ping 192.168.100.2 # should still work ip link set br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1 ping 192.168.100.2 # should still work but doesn't As reported by Florian, some drivers look at ds->vlan_filtering in their .port_vlan_add() implementation. So this patch also makes sure that ds->vlan_filtering is committed before calling the driver. This is the reason why it is first committed, then restored on the failure path. Reported-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reported-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Tested-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-24 00:22:57 +03:00
int dsa_slave_manage_vlan_filtering(struct net_device *dev,
bool vlan_filtering);
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
net: dsa: add slave to port helper Many portions of DSA core code require to get the dsa_port structure corresponding to a slave net_device. For this purpose, introduce a dsa_slave_to_port() helper. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-16 18:12:15 +03:00
static inline struct dsa_port *dsa_slave_to_port(const struct net_device *dev)
{
struct dsa_slave_priv *p = netdev_priv(dev);
return p->dp;
}
net: dsa: add slave to master helper Many part of the DSA slave code require to get the master device assigned to a slave device. Remove dsa_master_netdev() in favor of a dsa_slave_to_master() helper which does that. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-16 18:12:16 +03:00
static inline struct net_device *
dsa_slave_to_master(const struct net_device *dev)
{
struct dsa_port *dp = dsa_slave_to_port(dev);
net: dsa: introduce dsa_port_get_master() There is a desire to support for DSA masters in a LAG. That configuration is intended to work by simply enslaving the master to a bonding/team device. But the physical DSA master (the LAG slave) still has a dev->dsa_ptr, and that cpu_dp still corresponds to the physical CPU port. However, we would like to be able to retrieve the LAG that's the upper of the physical DSA master. In preparation for that, introduce a helper called dsa_port_get_master() that replaces all occurrences of the dp->cpu_dp->master pattern. The distinction between LAG and non-LAG will be made later within the helper itself. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:58 +03:00
return dsa_port_to_master(dp);
net: dsa: add slave to master helper Many part of the DSA slave code require to get the master device assigned to a slave device. Remove dsa_master_netdev() in favor of a dsa_slave_to_master() helper which does that. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-10-16 18:12:16 +03:00
}
net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs Currently the bridge untags VLANs present in its VLAN groups in __allowed_ingress() only when VLAN filtering is enabled. But when a skb is seen on the RX path as tagged with the bridge's pvid, and that bridge has vlan_filtering=0, and there isn't any 8021q upper with that VLAN either, then we have a problem. The bridge will not untag it (since it is supposed to remain VLAN-unaware), and pvid-tagged communication will be broken. There are 2 situations where we can end up like that: 1. When installing a pvid in egress-tagged mode, like this: ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set swp0 master br0 bridge vlan del dev swp0 vid 1 bridge vlan add dev swp0 vid 1 pvid This happens because DSA configures the VLAN membership of the CPU port using the same flags as swp0 (in this case "pvid and not untagged"), in an attempt to copy the frame as-is from ingress to the CPU. However, in this case, the packet may arrive untagged on ingress, it will be pvid-tagged by the ingress port, and will be sent as egress-tagged towards the CPU. Otherwise stated, the CPU will see a VLAN tag where there was none to speak of on ingress. When vlan_filtering is 1, this is not a problem, as stated in the first paragraph, because __allowed_ingress() will pop it. But currently, when vlan_filtering is 0 and we have such a VLAN configuration, we need an 8021q upper (br0.1) to be able to ping over that VLAN, which is not symmetrical with the vlan_filtering=1 case, and therefore, confusing for users. Basically what DSA attempts to do is simply an approximation: try to copy the skb with (or without) the same VLAN all the way up to the CPU. But DSA drivers treat CPU port VLAN membership in various ways (which is a good segue into situation 2). And some of those drivers simply tell the CPU port to copy the frame unmodified, which is the golden standard when it comes to VLAN processing (therefore, any driver which can configure the hardware to do that, should do that, and discard the VLAN flags requested by DSA on the CPU port). 2. Some DSA drivers always configure the CPU port as egress-tagged, in an attempt to recover the classified VLAN from the skb. These drivers cannot work at all with untagged traffic when bridged in vlan_filtering=0 mode. And they can't go for the easy "just keep the pvid as egress-untagged towards the CPU" route, because each front port can have its own pvid, and that might require conflicting VLAN membership settings on the CPU port (swp1 is pvid for VID 1 and egress-tagged for VID 2; swp2 is egress-taggeed for VID 1 and pvid for VID 2; with this simplistic approach, the CPU port, which is really a separate hardware entity and has its own VLAN membership settings, would end up being egress-untagged in both VID 1 and VID 2, therefore losing the VLAN tags of ingress traffic). So the only thing we can do is to create a helper function for resolving the problematic case (that is, a function which untags the bridge pvid when that is in vlan_filtering=0 mode), which taggers in need should call. It isn't called from the generic DSA receive path because there are drivers that fall neither in the first nor second category. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-09-24 00:40:37 +03:00
/* If under a bridge with vlan_filtering=0, make sure to send pvid-tagged
* frames as untagged, since the bridge will not untag them.
*/
static inline struct sk_buff *dsa_untag_bridge_pvid(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
struct dsa_port *dp = dsa_slave_to_port(skb->dev);
net: dsa: hide dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num in the core behind helpers The location of the bridge device pointer and number is going to change. It is not going to be kept individually per port, but in a common structure allocated dynamically and which will have lockdep validation. Create helpers to access these elements so that we have a migration path to the new organization. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:52 +03:00
struct net_device *br = dsa_port_bridge_dev_get(dp);
net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs Currently the bridge untags VLANs present in its VLAN groups in __allowed_ingress() only when VLAN filtering is enabled. But when a skb is seen on the RX path as tagged with the bridge's pvid, and that bridge has vlan_filtering=0, and there isn't any 8021q upper with that VLAN either, then we have a problem. The bridge will not untag it (since it is supposed to remain VLAN-unaware), and pvid-tagged communication will be broken. There are 2 situations where we can end up like that: 1. When installing a pvid in egress-tagged mode, like this: ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set swp0 master br0 bridge vlan del dev swp0 vid 1 bridge vlan add dev swp0 vid 1 pvid This happens because DSA configures the VLAN membership of the CPU port using the same flags as swp0 (in this case "pvid and not untagged"), in an attempt to copy the frame as-is from ingress to the CPU. However, in this case, the packet may arrive untagged on ingress, it will be pvid-tagged by the ingress port, and will be sent as egress-tagged towards the CPU. Otherwise stated, the CPU will see a VLAN tag where there was none to speak of on ingress. When vlan_filtering is 1, this is not a problem, as stated in the first paragraph, because __allowed_ingress() will pop it. But currently, when vlan_filtering is 0 and we have such a VLAN configuration, we need an 8021q upper (br0.1) to be able to ping over that VLAN, which is not symmetrical with the vlan_filtering=1 case, and therefore, confusing for users. Basically what DSA attempts to do is simply an approximation: try to copy the skb with (or without) the same VLAN all the way up to the CPU. But DSA drivers treat CPU port VLAN membership in various ways (which is a good segue into situation 2). And some of those drivers simply tell the CPU port to copy the frame unmodified, which is the golden standard when it comes to VLAN processing (therefore, any driver which can configure the hardware to do that, should do that, and discard the VLAN flags requested by DSA on the CPU port). 2. Some DSA drivers always configure the CPU port as egress-tagged, in an attempt to recover the classified VLAN from the skb. These drivers cannot work at all with untagged traffic when bridged in vlan_filtering=0 mode. And they can't go for the easy "just keep the pvid as egress-untagged towards the CPU" route, because each front port can have its own pvid, and that might require conflicting VLAN membership settings on the CPU port (swp1 is pvid for VID 1 and egress-tagged for VID 2; swp2 is egress-taggeed for VID 1 and pvid for VID 2; with this simplistic approach, the CPU port, which is really a separate hardware entity and has its own VLAN membership settings, would end up being egress-untagged in both VID 1 and VID 2, therefore losing the VLAN tags of ingress traffic). So the only thing we can do is to create a helper function for resolving the problematic case (that is, a function which untags the bridge pvid when that is in vlan_filtering=0 mode), which taggers in need should call. It isn't called from the generic DSA receive path because there are drivers that fall neither in the first nor second category. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-09-24 00:40:37 +03:00
struct net_device *dev = skb->dev;
struct net_device *upper_dev;
u16 vid, pvid, proto;
int err;
if (!br || br_vlan_enabled(br))
return skb;
err = br_vlan_get_proto(br, &proto);
if (err)
return skb;
/* Move VLAN tag from data to hwaccel */
net: dsa: Obtain VLAN protocol from skb->protocol Now that dsa_untag_bridge_pvid() is called after eth_type_trans() we are guaranteed that skb->protocol will be set to a correct value, thus allowing us to avoid calling vlan_eth_hdr(). Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-10-02 05:42:14 +03:00
if (!skb_vlan_tag_present(skb) && skb->protocol == htons(proto)) {
net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs Currently the bridge untags VLANs present in its VLAN groups in __allowed_ingress() only when VLAN filtering is enabled. But when a skb is seen on the RX path as tagged with the bridge's pvid, and that bridge has vlan_filtering=0, and there isn't any 8021q upper with that VLAN either, then we have a problem. The bridge will not untag it (since it is supposed to remain VLAN-unaware), and pvid-tagged communication will be broken. There are 2 situations where we can end up like that: 1. When installing a pvid in egress-tagged mode, like this: ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set swp0 master br0 bridge vlan del dev swp0 vid 1 bridge vlan add dev swp0 vid 1 pvid This happens because DSA configures the VLAN membership of the CPU port using the same flags as swp0 (in this case "pvid and not untagged"), in an attempt to copy the frame as-is from ingress to the CPU. However, in this case, the packet may arrive untagged on ingress, it will be pvid-tagged by the ingress port, and will be sent as egress-tagged towards the CPU. Otherwise stated, the CPU will see a VLAN tag where there was none to speak of on ingress. When vlan_filtering is 1, this is not a problem, as stated in the first paragraph, because __allowed_ingress() will pop it. But currently, when vlan_filtering is 0 and we have such a VLAN configuration, we need an 8021q upper (br0.1) to be able to ping over that VLAN, which is not symmetrical with the vlan_filtering=1 case, and therefore, confusing for users. Basically what DSA attempts to do is simply an approximation: try to copy the skb with (or without) the same VLAN all the way up to the CPU. But DSA drivers treat CPU port VLAN membership in various ways (which is a good segue into situation 2). And some of those drivers simply tell the CPU port to copy the frame unmodified, which is the golden standard when it comes to VLAN processing (therefore, any driver which can configure the hardware to do that, should do that, and discard the VLAN flags requested by DSA on the CPU port). 2. Some DSA drivers always configure the CPU port as egress-tagged, in an attempt to recover the classified VLAN from the skb. These drivers cannot work at all with untagged traffic when bridged in vlan_filtering=0 mode. And they can't go for the easy "just keep the pvid as egress-untagged towards the CPU" route, because each front port can have its own pvid, and that might require conflicting VLAN membership settings on the CPU port (swp1 is pvid for VID 1 and egress-tagged for VID 2; swp2 is egress-taggeed for VID 1 and pvid for VID 2; with this simplistic approach, the CPU port, which is really a separate hardware entity and has its own VLAN membership settings, would end up being egress-untagged in both VID 1 and VID 2, therefore losing the VLAN tags of ingress traffic). So the only thing we can do is to create a helper function for resolving the problematic case (that is, a function which untags the bridge pvid when that is in vlan_filtering=0 mode), which taggers in need should call. It isn't called from the generic DSA receive path because there are drivers that fall neither in the first nor second category. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-09-24 00:40:37 +03:00
skb = skb_vlan_untag(skb);
if (!skb)
return NULL;
}
if (!skb_vlan_tag_present(skb))
return skb;
vid = skb_vlan_tag_get_id(skb);
/* We already run under an RCU read-side critical section since
* we are called from netif_receive_skb_list_internal().
*/
err = br_vlan_get_pvid_rcu(dev, &pvid);
if (err)
return skb;
if (vid != pvid)
return skb;
/* The sad part about attempting to untag from DSA is that we
* don't know, unless we check, if the skb will end up in
* the bridge's data path - br_allowed_ingress() - or not.
* For example, there might be an 8021q upper for the
* default_pvid of the bridge, which will steal VLAN-tagged traffic
* from the bridge's data path. This is a configuration that DSA
* supports because vlan_filtering is 0. In that case, we should
* definitely keep the tag, to make sure it keeps working.
*/
net: dsa: Utilize __vlan_find_dev_deep_rcu() Now that we are guaranteed that dsa_untag_bridge_pvid() is called after eth_type_trans() we can utilize __vlan_find_dev_deep_rcu() which will take care of finding an 802.1Q upper on top of a bridge master. A common use case, prior to 12a1526d067 ("net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs") was to configure a bridge 802.1Q upper like this: ip link add name br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link add link br0 name br0.1 type vlan id 1 in order to pop the default_pvid VLAN tag. With this change we restore that behavior while still allowing the DSA receive path to automatically pop the VLAN tag. Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-10-02 05:42:15 +03:00
upper_dev = __vlan_find_dev_deep_rcu(br, htons(proto), vid);
if (upper_dev)
return skb;
net: dsa: untag the bridge pvid from rx skbs Currently the bridge untags VLANs present in its VLAN groups in __allowed_ingress() only when VLAN filtering is enabled. But when a skb is seen on the RX path as tagged with the bridge's pvid, and that bridge has vlan_filtering=0, and there isn't any 8021q upper with that VLAN either, then we have a problem. The bridge will not untag it (since it is supposed to remain VLAN-unaware), and pvid-tagged communication will be broken. There are 2 situations where we can end up like that: 1. When installing a pvid in egress-tagged mode, like this: ip link add dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0 ip link set swp0 master br0 bridge vlan del dev swp0 vid 1 bridge vlan add dev swp0 vid 1 pvid This happens because DSA configures the VLAN membership of the CPU port using the same flags as swp0 (in this case "pvid and not untagged"), in an attempt to copy the frame as-is from ingress to the CPU. However, in this case, the packet may arrive untagged on ingress, it will be pvid-tagged by the ingress port, and will be sent as egress-tagged towards the CPU. Otherwise stated, the CPU will see a VLAN tag where there was none to speak of on ingress. When vlan_filtering is 1, this is not a problem, as stated in the first paragraph, because __allowed_ingress() will pop it. But currently, when vlan_filtering is 0 and we have such a VLAN configuration, we need an 8021q upper (br0.1) to be able to ping over that VLAN, which is not symmetrical with the vlan_filtering=1 case, and therefore, confusing for users. Basically what DSA attempts to do is simply an approximation: try to copy the skb with (or without) the same VLAN all the way up to the CPU. But DSA drivers treat CPU port VLAN membership in various ways (which is a good segue into situation 2). And some of those drivers simply tell the CPU port to copy the frame unmodified, which is the golden standard when it comes to VLAN processing (therefore, any driver which can configure the hardware to do that, should do that, and discard the VLAN flags requested by DSA on the CPU port). 2. Some DSA drivers always configure the CPU port as egress-tagged, in an attempt to recover the classified VLAN from the skb. These drivers cannot work at all with untagged traffic when bridged in vlan_filtering=0 mode. And they can't go for the easy "just keep the pvid as egress-untagged towards the CPU" route, because each front port can have its own pvid, and that might require conflicting VLAN membership settings on the CPU port (swp1 is pvid for VID 1 and egress-tagged for VID 2; swp2 is egress-taggeed for VID 1 and pvid for VID 2; with this simplistic approach, the CPU port, which is really a separate hardware entity and has its own VLAN membership settings, would end up being egress-untagged in both VID 1 and VID 2, therefore losing the VLAN tags of ingress traffic). So the only thing we can do is to create a helper function for resolving the problematic case (that is, a function which untags the bridge pvid when that is in vlan_filtering=0 mode), which taggers in need should call. It isn't called from the generic DSA receive path because there are drivers that fall neither in the first nor second category. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-09-24 00:40:37 +03:00
__vlan_hwaccel_clear_tag(skb);
return skb;
}
net: dsa: sja1105: add support for imprecise RX This is already common knowledge by now, but the sja1105 does not have hardware support for DSA tagging for data plane packets, and tag_8021q sets up a unique pvid per port, transmitted as VLAN-tagged towards the CPU, for the source port to be decoded nonetheless. When the port is part of a VLAN-aware bridge, the pvid committed to hardware is taken from the bridge and not from tag_8021q, so we need to work with that the best we can. Configure the switches to send all packets to the CPU as VLAN-tagged (even ones that were originally untagged on the wire) and make use of dsa_untag_bridge_pvid() to get rid of it before we send those packets up the network stack. With the classified VLAN used by hardware known to the tagger, we first peek at the VID in an attempt to figure out if the packet was received from a VLAN-unaware port (standalone or under a VLAN-unaware bridge), case in which we can continue to call dsa_8021q_rcv(). If that is not the case, the packet probably came from a VLAN-aware bridge. So we call the DSA helper that finds for us a "designated bridge port" - one that is a member of the VLAN ID from the packet, and is in the proper STP state - basically these are all checks performed by br_handle_frame() in the software RX data path. The bridge will accept the packet as valid even if the source port was maybe wrong. So it will maybe learn the MAC SA of the packet on the wrong port, and its software FDB will be out of sync with the hardware FDB. So replies towards this same MAC DA will not work, because the bridge will send towards a different netdev. This is where the bridge data plane offload ("imprecise TX") added by the next patch comes in handy. The software FDB is wrong, true, but the hardware FDB isn't, and by offloading the bridge forwarding plane we have a chance to right a wrong, and have the hardware look up the FDB for us for the reply packet. So it all cancels out. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-26 19:55:34 +03:00
/* For switches without hardware support for DSA tagging to be able
* to support termination through the bridge.
*/
static inline struct net_device *
dsa_find_designated_bridge_port_by_vid(struct net_device *master, u16 vid)
{
struct dsa_port *cpu_dp = master->dsa_ptr;
struct dsa_switch_tree *dst = cpu_dp->dst;
struct bridge_vlan_info vinfo;
struct net_device *slave;
struct dsa_port *dp;
int err;
list_for_each_entry(dp, &dst->ports, list) {
if (dp->type != DSA_PORT_TYPE_USER)
continue;
net: dsa: keep the bridge_dev and bridge_num as part of the same structure The main desire behind this is to provide coherent bridge information to the fast path without locking. For example, right now we set dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num from separate code paths, it is theoretically possible for a packet transmission to read these two port properties consecutively and find a bridge number which does not correspond with the bridge device. Another desire is to start passing more complex bridge information to dsa_switch_ops functions. For example, with FDB isolation, it is expected that drivers will need to be passed the bridge which requested an FDB/MDB entry to be offloaded, and along with that bridge_dev, the associated bridge_num should be passed too, in case the driver might want to implement an isolation scheme based on that number. We already pass the {bridge_dev, bridge_num} pair to the TX forwarding offload switch API, however we'd like to remove that and squash it into the basic bridge join/leave API. So that means we need to pass this pair to the bridge join/leave API. During dsa_port_bridge_leave, first we unset dp->bridge_dev, then we call the driver's .port_bridge_leave with what used to be our dp->bridge_dev, but provided as an argument. When bridge_dev and bridge_num get folded into a single structure, we need to preserve this behavior in dsa_port_bridge_leave: we need a copy of what used to be in dp->bridge. Switch drivers check bridge membership by comparing dp->bridge_dev with the provided bridge_dev, but now, if we provide the struct dsa_bridge as a pointer, they cannot keep comparing dp->bridge to the provided pointer, since this only points to an on-stack copy. To make this obvious and prevent driver writers from forgetting and doing stupid things, in this new API, the struct dsa_bridge is provided as a full structure (not very large, contains an int and a pointer) instead of a pointer. An explicit comparison function needs to be used to determine bridge membership: dsa_port_offloads_bridge(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:56 +03:00
if (!dp->bridge)
net: dsa: sja1105: add support for imprecise RX This is already common knowledge by now, but the sja1105 does not have hardware support for DSA tagging for data plane packets, and tag_8021q sets up a unique pvid per port, transmitted as VLAN-tagged towards the CPU, for the source port to be decoded nonetheless. When the port is part of a VLAN-aware bridge, the pvid committed to hardware is taken from the bridge and not from tag_8021q, so we need to work with that the best we can. Configure the switches to send all packets to the CPU as VLAN-tagged (even ones that were originally untagged on the wire) and make use of dsa_untag_bridge_pvid() to get rid of it before we send those packets up the network stack. With the classified VLAN used by hardware known to the tagger, we first peek at the VID in an attempt to figure out if the packet was received from a VLAN-unaware port (standalone or under a VLAN-unaware bridge), case in which we can continue to call dsa_8021q_rcv(). If that is not the case, the packet probably came from a VLAN-aware bridge. So we call the DSA helper that finds for us a "designated bridge port" - one that is a member of the VLAN ID from the packet, and is in the proper STP state - basically these are all checks performed by br_handle_frame() in the software RX data path. The bridge will accept the packet as valid even if the source port was maybe wrong. So it will maybe learn the MAC SA of the packet on the wrong port, and its software FDB will be out of sync with the hardware FDB. So replies towards this same MAC DA will not work, because the bridge will send towards a different netdev. This is where the bridge data plane offload ("imprecise TX") added by the next patch comes in handy. The software FDB is wrong, true, but the hardware FDB isn't, and by offloading the bridge forwarding plane we have a chance to right a wrong, and have the hardware look up the FDB for us for the reply packet. So it all cancels out. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-26 19:55:34 +03:00
continue;
if (dp->stp_state != BR_STATE_LEARNING &&
dp->stp_state != BR_STATE_FORWARDING)
continue;
/* Since the bridge might learn this packet, keep the CPU port
* affinity with the port that will be used for the reply on
* xmit.
*/
if (dp->cpu_dp != cpu_dp)
continue;
slave = dp->slave;
err = br_vlan_get_info_rcu(slave, vid, &vinfo);
if (err)
continue;
return slave;
}
return NULL;
}
net: dsa: don't set skb->offload_fwd_mark when not offloading the bridge DSA has gained the recent ability to deal gracefully with upper interfaces it cannot offload, such as the bridge, bonding or team drivers. When such uppers exist, the ports are still in standalone mode as far as the hardware is concerned. But when we deliver packets to the software bridge in order for that to do the forwarding, there is an unpleasant surprise in that the bridge will refuse to forward them. This is because we unconditionally set skb->offload_fwd_mark = true, meaning that the bridge thinks the frames were already forwarded in hardware by us. Since dp->bridge_dev is populated only when there is hardware offload for it, but not in the software fallback case, let's introduce a new helper that can be called from the tagger data path which sets the skb->offload_fwd_mark accordingly to zero when there is no hardware offload for bridging. This lets the bridge forward packets back to other interfaces of our switch, if needed. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-29 17:56:00 +03:00
/* If the ingress port offloads the bridge, we mark the frame as autonomously
* forwarded by hardware, so the software bridge doesn't forward in twice, back
* to us, because we already did. However, if we're in fallback mode and we do
net: dsa: keep the bridge_dev and bridge_num as part of the same structure The main desire behind this is to provide coherent bridge information to the fast path without locking. For example, right now we set dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num from separate code paths, it is theoretically possible for a packet transmission to read these two port properties consecutively and find a bridge number which does not correspond with the bridge device. Another desire is to start passing more complex bridge information to dsa_switch_ops functions. For example, with FDB isolation, it is expected that drivers will need to be passed the bridge which requested an FDB/MDB entry to be offloaded, and along with that bridge_dev, the associated bridge_num should be passed too, in case the driver might want to implement an isolation scheme based on that number. We already pass the {bridge_dev, bridge_num} pair to the TX forwarding offload switch API, however we'd like to remove that and squash it into the basic bridge join/leave API. So that means we need to pass this pair to the bridge join/leave API. During dsa_port_bridge_leave, first we unset dp->bridge_dev, then we call the driver's .port_bridge_leave with what used to be our dp->bridge_dev, but provided as an argument. When bridge_dev and bridge_num get folded into a single structure, we need to preserve this behavior in dsa_port_bridge_leave: we need a copy of what used to be in dp->bridge. Switch drivers check bridge membership by comparing dp->bridge_dev with the provided bridge_dev, but now, if we provide the struct dsa_bridge as a pointer, they cannot keep comparing dp->bridge to the provided pointer, since this only points to an on-stack copy. To make this obvious and prevent driver writers from forgetting and doing stupid things, in this new API, the struct dsa_bridge is provided as a full structure (not very large, contains an int and a pointer) instead of a pointer. An explicit comparison function needs to be used to determine bridge membership: dsa_port_offloads_bridge(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:56 +03:00
* software bridging, we are not offloading it, therefore the dp->bridge
net: dsa: don't set skb->offload_fwd_mark when not offloading the bridge DSA has gained the recent ability to deal gracefully with upper interfaces it cannot offload, such as the bridge, bonding or team drivers. When such uppers exist, the ports are still in standalone mode as far as the hardware is concerned. But when we deliver packets to the software bridge in order for that to do the forwarding, there is an unpleasant surprise in that the bridge will refuse to forward them. This is because we unconditionally set skb->offload_fwd_mark = true, meaning that the bridge thinks the frames were already forwarded in hardware by us. Since dp->bridge_dev is populated only when there is hardware offload for it, but not in the software fallback case, let's introduce a new helper that can be called from the tagger data path which sets the skb->offload_fwd_mark accordingly to zero when there is no hardware offload for bridging. This lets the bridge forward packets back to other interfaces of our switch, if needed. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-29 17:56:00 +03:00
* pointer is not populated, and flooding needs to be done by software (we are
* effectively operating in standalone ports mode).
*/
static inline void dsa_default_offload_fwd_mark(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
struct dsa_port *dp = dsa_slave_to_port(skb->dev);
net: dsa: keep the bridge_dev and bridge_num as part of the same structure The main desire behind this is to provide coherent bridge information to the fast path without locking. For example, right now we set dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num from separate code paths, it is theoretically possible for a packet transmission to read these two port properties consecutively and find a bridge number which does not correspond with the bridge device. Another desire is to start passing more complex bridge information to dsa_switch_ops functions. For example, with FDB isolation, it is expected that drivers will need to be passed the bridge which requested an FDB/MDB entry to be offloaded, and along with that bridge_dev, the associated bridge_num should be passed too, in case the driver might want to implement an isolation scheme based on that number. We already pass the {bridge_dev, bridge_num} pair to the TX forwarding offload switch API, however we'd like to remove that and squash it into the basic bridge join/leave API. So that means we need to pass this pair to the bridge join/leave API. During dsa_port_bridge_leave, first we unset dp->bridge_dev, then we call the driver's .port_bridge_leave with what used to be our dp->bridge_dev, but provided as an argument. When bridge_dev and bridge_num get folded into a single structure, we need to preserve this behavior in dsa_port_bridge_leave: we need a copy of what used to be in dp->bridge. Switch drivers check bridge membership by comparing dp->bridge_dev with the provided bridge_dev, but now, if we provide the struct dsa_bridge as a pointer, they cannot keep comparing dp->bridge to the provided pointer, since this only points to an on-stack copy. To make this obvious and prevent driver writers from forgetting and doing stupid things, in this new API, the struct dsa_bridge is provided as a full structure (not very large, contains an int and a pointer) instead of a pointer. An explicit comparison function needs to be used to determine bridge membership: dsa_port_offloads_bridge(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:56 +03:00
skb->offload_fwd_mark = !!(dp->bridge);
net: dsa: don't set skb->offload_fwd_mark when not offloading the bridge DSA has gained the recent ability to deal gracefully with upper interfaces it cannot offload, such as the bridge, bonding or team drivers. When such uppers exist, the ports are still in standalone mode as far as the hardware is concerned. But when we deliver packets to the software bridge in order for that to do the forwarding, there is an unpleasant surprise in that the bridge will refuse to forward them. This is because we unconditionally set skb->offload_fwd_mark = true, meaning that the bridge thinks the frames were already forwarded in hardware by us. Since dp->bridge_dev is populated only when there is hardware offload for it, but not in the software fallback case, let's introduce a new helper that can be called from the tagger data path which sets the skb->offload_fwd_mark accordingly to zero when there is no hardware offload for bridging. This lets the bridge forward packets back to other interfaces of our switch, if needed. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-29 17:56:00 +03:00
}
net: dsa: create a helper that strips EtherType DSA headers on RX All header taggers open-code a memmove that is fairly not all that obvious, and we can hide the details behind a helper function, since the only thing specific to the driver is the length of the header tag. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-10 16:13:53 +03:00
/* Helper for removing DSA header tags from packets in the RX path.
* Must not be called before skb_pull(len).
* skb->data
* |
* v
* | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
* +-----------------------+-----------------------+---------------+-------+
* | Destination MAC | Source MAC | DSA header | EType |
* +-----------------------+-----------------------+---------------+-------+
* | |
* <----- len -----> <----- len ----->
* |
* >>>>>>> v
* >>>>>>> | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
* >>>>>>> +-----------------------+-----------------------+-------+
* >>>>>>> | Destination MAC | Source MAC | EType |
* +-----------------------+-----------------------+-------+
* ^
* |
* skb->data
*/
static inline void dsa_strip_etype_header(struct sk_buff *skb, int len)
{
memmove(skb->data - ETH_HLEN, skb->data - ETH_HLEN - len, 2 * ETH_ALEN);
}
net: dsa: create a helper which allocates space for EtherType DSA headers Hide away the memmove used by DSA EtherType header taggers to shift the MAC SA and DA to the left to make room for the header, after they've called skb_push(). The call to skb_push() is still left explicit in drivers, to be symmetric with dsa_strip_etype_header, and because not all callers can be refactored to do it (for example, brcm_tag_xmit_ll has common code for a pre-Ethernet DSA tag and an EtherType DSA tag). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-10 16:13:54 +03:00
/* Helper for creating space for DSA header tags in TX path packets.
* Must not be called before skb_push(len).
*
* Before:
*
* <<<<<<< | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
* ^ <<<<<<< +-----------------------+-----------------------+-------+
* | <<<<<<< | Destination MAC | Source MAC | EType |
* | +-----------------------+-----------------------+-------+
* <----- len ----->
* |
* |
* skb->data
*
* After:
*
* | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
* +-----------------------+-----------------------+---------------+-------+
* | Destination MAC | Source MAC | DSA header | EType |
* +-----------------------+-----------------------+---------------+-------+
* ^ | |
* | <----- len ----->
* skb->data
*/
static inline void dsa_alloc_etype_header(struct sk_buff *skb, int len)
{
memmove(skb->data, skb->data + len, 2 * ETH_ALEN);
}
net: dsa: create a helper for locating EtherType DSA headers on RX It seems that protocol tagging driver writers are always surprised about the formula they use to reach their EtherType header on RX, which becomes apparent from the fact that there are comments in multiple drivers that mention the same information. Create a helper that returns a void pointer to skb->data - 2, as well as centralize the explanation why that is the case. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-10 16:13:55 +03:00
/* On RX, eth_type_trans() on the DSA master pulls ETH_HLEN bytes starting from
* skb_mac_header(skb), which leaves skb->data pointing at the first byte after
* what the DSA master perceives as the EtherType (the beginning of the L3
* protocol). Since DSA EtherType header taggers treat the EtherType as part of
* the DSA tag itself, and the EtherType is 2 bytes in length, the DSA header
* is located 2 bytes behind skb->data. Note that EtherType in this context
* means the first 2 bytes of the DSA header, not the encapsulated EtherType
* that will become visible after the DSA header is stripped.
*/
static inline void *dsa_etype_header_pos_rx(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
return skb->data - 2;
}
net: dsa: create a helper for locating EtherType DSA headers on TX Create a similar helper for locating the offset to the DSA header relative to skb->data, and make the existing EtherType header taggers to use it. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-08-10 16:13:56 +03:00
/* On TX, skb->data points to skb_mac_header(skb), which means that EtherType
* header taggers start exactly where the EtherType is (the EtherType is
* treated as part of the DSA header).
*/
static inline void *dsa_etype_header_pos_tx(struct sk_buff *skb)
{
return skb->data + 2 * ETH_ALEN;
}
net: dsa: add switch notifier Add a notifier block per DSA switch, registered against a notifier head in the switch fabric they belong to. This infrastructure will allow to propagate fabric-wide events such as port bridging, VLAN configuration, etc. If a DSA switch driver cares about cross-chip configuration, such events can be caught. Signed-off-by: Vivien Didelot <vivien.didelot@savoirfairelinux.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2017-02-03 21:20:20 +03:00
/* switch.c */
int dsa_switch_register_notifier(struct dsa_switch *ds);
void dsa_switch_unregister_notifier(struct dsa_switch *ds);
net: dsa: implement auto-normalization of MTU for bridge hardware datapath Many switches don't have an explicit knob for configuring the MTU (maximum transmission unit per interface). Instead, they do the length-based packet admission checks on the ingress interface, for reasons that are easy to understand (why would you accept a packet in the queuing subsystem if you know you're going to drop it anyway). So it is actually the MRU that these switches permit configuring. In Linux there only exists the IFLA_MTU netlink attribute and the associated dev_set_mtu function. The comments like to play blind and say that it's changing the "maximum transfer unit", which is to say that there isn't any directionality in the meaning of the MTU word. So that is the interpretation that this patch is giving to things: MTU == MRU. When 2 interfaces having different MTUs are bridged, the bridge driver MTU auto-adjustment logic kicks in: what br_mtu_auto_adjust() does is it adjusts the MTU of the bridge net device itself (and not that of the slave net devices) to the minimum value of all slave interfaces, in order for forwarded packets to not exceed the MTU regardless of the interface they are received and send on. The idea behind this behavior, and why the slave MTUs are not adjusted, is that normal termination from Linux over the L2 forwarding domain should happen over the bridge net device, which _is_ properly limited by the minimum MTU. And termination over individual slave devices is possible even if those are bridged. But that is not "forwarding", so there's no reason to do normalization there, since only a single interface sees that packet. The problem with those switches that can only control the MRU is with the offloaded data path, where a packet received on an interface with MRU 9000 would still be forwarded to an interface with MRU 1500. And the br_mtu_auto_adjust() function does not really help, since the MTU configured on the bridge net device is ignored. In order to enforce the de-facto MTU == MRU rule for these switches, we need to do MTU normalization, which means: in order for no packet larger than the MTU configured on this port to be sent, then we need to limit the MRU on all ports that this packet could possibly come from. AKA since we are configuring the MRU via MTU, it means that all ports within a bridge forwarding domain should have the same MTU. And that is exactly what this patch is trying to do. >From an implementation perspective, we try to follow the intent of the user, otherwise there is a risk that we might livelock them (they try to change the MTU on an already-bridged interface, but we just keep changing it back in an attempt to keep the MTU normalized). So the MTU that the bridge is normalized to is either: - The most recently changed one: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 ip link set dev swp0 mtu 1400 This sequence will make swp1 inherit MTU 1400 from swp0. - The one of the most recently added interface to the bridge: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 mtu 1400 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 The above sequence will make swp0 inherit MTU 1400 as well. Suggested-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:43 +03:00
net: dsa: install secondary unicast and multicast addresses as host FDB/MDB In preparation of disabling flooding towards the CPU in standalone ports mode, identify the addresses requested by upper interfaces and use the new API for DSA FDB isolation to request the hardware driver to offload these as FDB or MDB objects. The objects belong to the user port's database, and are installed pointing towards the CPU port. Because dev_uc_add()/dev_mc_add() is VLAN-unaware, we offload to the port standalone database addresses with VID 0 (also VLAN-unaware). So this excludes switches with global VLAN filtering from supporting unicast filtering, because there, it is possible for a port of a switch to join a VLAN-aware bridge, and this changes the VLAN awareness of standalone ports, requiring VLAN-aware standalone host FDB entries. For the same reason, hellcreek, which requires VLAN awareness in standalone mode, is also exempted from unicast filtering. We create "standalone" variants of dsa_port_host_fdb_add() and dsa_port_host_mdb_add() (and the _del coresponding functions). We also create a separate work item type for handling deferred standalone host FDB/MDB entries compared to the switchdev one. This is done for the purpose of clarity - the procedure for offloading a bridge FDB entry is different than offloading a standalone one, and the switchdev event work handles only FDBs anyway, not MDBs. Deferral is needed for standalone entries because ndo_set_rx_mode runs in atomic context. We could probably optimize things a little by first queuing up all entries that need to be offloaded, and scheduling the work item just once, but the data structures that we can pass through __dev_uc_sync() and __dev_mc_sync() are limiting (there is nothing like a void *priv), so we'd have to keep the list of queued events somewhere in struct dsa_switch, and possibly a lock for it. Too complicated for now. Adding the address to the master is handled by dev_uc_sync(), adding it to the hardware is handled by __dev_uc_sync(). So this is the reason why dsa_port_standalone_host_fdb_add() does not call dev_uc_add(). Not that it had the rtnl_mutex anyway - ndo_set_rx_mode has it, but is atomic. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-03-02 22:14:10 +03:00
static inline bool dsa_switch_supports_uc_filtering(struct dsa_switch *ds)
{
return ds->ops->port_fdb_add && ds->ops->port_fdb_del &&
ds->fdb_isolation && !ds->vlan_filtering_is_global &&
!ds->needs_standalone_vlan_filtering;
}
static inline bool dsa_switch_supports_mc_filtering(struct dsa_switch *ds)
{
return ds->ops->port_mdb_add && ds->ops->port_mdb_del &&
ds->fdb_isolation && !ds->vlan_filtering_is_global &&
!ds->needs_standalone_vlan_filtering;
}
net: dsa: implement auto-normalization of MTU for bridge hardware datapath Many switches don't have an explicit knob for configuring the MTU (maximum transmission unit per interface). Instead, they do the length-based packet admission checks on the ingress interface, for reasons that are easy to understand (why would you accept a packet in the queuing subsystem if you know you're going to drop it anyway). So it is actually the MRU that these switches permit configuring. In Linux there only exists the IFLA_MTU netlink attribute and the associated dev_set_mtu function. The comments like to play blind and say that it's changing the "maximum transfer unit", which is to say that there isn't any directionality in the meaning of the MTU word. So that is the interpretation that this patch is giving to things: MTU == MRU. When 2 interfaces having different MTUs are bridged, the bridge driver MTU auto-adjustment logic kicks in: what br_mtu_auto_adjust() does is it adjusts the MTU of the bridge net device itself (and not that of the slave net devices) to the minimum value of all slave interfaces, in order for forwarded packets to not exceed the MTU regardless of the interface they are received and send on. The idea behind this behavior, and why the slave MTUs are not adjusted, is that normal termination from Linux over the L2 forwarding domain should happen over the bridge net device, which _is_ properly limited by the minimum MTU. And termination over individual slave devices is possible even if those are bridged. But that is not "forwarding", so there's no reason to do normalization there, since only a single interface sees that packet. The problem with those switches that can only control the MRU is with the offloaded data path, where a packet received on an interface with MRU 9000 would still be forwarded to an interface with MRU 1500. And the br_mtu_auto_adjust() function does not really help, since the MTU configured on the bridge net device is ignored. In order to enforce the de-facto MTU == MRU rule for these switches, we need to do MTU normalization, which means: in order for no packet larger than the MTU configured on this port to be sent, then we need to limit the MRU on all ports that this packet could possibly come from. AKA since we are configuring the MRU via MTU, it means that all ports within a bridge forwarding domain should have the same MTU. And that is exactly what this patch is trying to do. >From an implementation perspective, we try to follow the intent of the user, otherwise there is a risk that we might livelock them (they try to change the MTU on an already-bridged interface, but we just keep changing it back in an attempt to keep the MTU normalized). So the MTU that the bridge is normalized to is either: - The most recently changed one: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 ip link set dev swp0 mtu 1400 This sequence will make swp1 inherit MTU 1400 from swp0. - The one of the most recently added interface to the bridge: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 mtu 1400 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 The above sequence will make swp0 inherit MTU 1400 as well. Suggested-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:43 +03:00
/* dsa2.c */
net: dsa: create a dsa_lag structure The main purpose of this change is to create a data structure for a LAG as seen by DSA. This is similar to what we have for bridging - we pass a copy of this structure by value to ->port_lag_join and ->port_lag_leave. For now we keep the lag_dev, id and a reference count in it. Future patches will add a list of FDB entries for the LAG (these also need to be refcounted to work properly). The LAG structure is created using dsa_port_lag_create() and destroyed using dsa_port_lag_destroy(), just like we have for bridging. Because now, the dsa_lag itself is refcounted, we can simplify dsa_lag_map() and dsa_lag_unmap(). These functions need to keep a LAG in the dst->lags array only as long as at least one port uses it. The refcounting logic inside those functions can be removed now - they are called only when we should perform the operation. dsa_lag_dev() is renamed to dsa_lag_by_id() and now returns the dsa_lag structure instead of the lag_dev net_device. dsa_lag_foreach_port() now takes the dsa_lag structure as argument. dst->lags holds an array of dsa_lag structures. dsa_lag_map() now also saves the dsa_lag->id value, so that linear walking of dst->lags in drivers using dsa_lag_id() is no longer necessary. They can just look at lag.id. dsa_port_lag_id_get() is a helper, similar to dsa_port_bridge_num_get(), which can be used by drivers to get the LAG ID assigned by DSA to a given port. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2022-02-23 17:00:49 +03:00
void dsa_lag_map(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst, struct dsa_lag *lag);
void dsa_lag_unmap(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst, struct dsa_lag *lag);
struct dsa_lag *dsa_tree_lag_find(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst,
const struct net_device *lag_dev);
net: dsa: allow the DSA master to be seen and changed through rtnetlink Some DSA switches have multiple CPU ports, which can be used to improve CPU termination throughput, but DSA, through dsa_tree_setup_cpu_ports(), sets up only the first one, leading to suboptimal use of hardware. The desire is to not change the default configuration but to permit the user to create a dynamic mapping between individual user ports and the CPU port that they are served by, configurable through rtnetlink. It is also intended to permit load balancing between CPU ports, and in that case, the foreseen model is for the DSA master to be a bonding interface whose lowers are the physical DSA masters. To that end, we create a struct rtnl_link_ops for DSA user ports with the "dsa" kind. We expose the IFLA_DSA_MASTER link attribute that contains the ifindex of the newly desired DSA master. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Paolo Abeni <pabeni@redhat.com>
2022-09-11 04:06:59 +03:00
struct net_device *dsa_tree_find_first_master(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst);
net: dsa: document the existing switch tree notifiers and add a new one The existence of dsa_broadcast has generated some confusion in the past: https://www.mail-archive.com/netdev@vger.kernel.org/msg365042.html So let's document the existing dsa_port_notify and dsa_broadcast functions and explain when each of them should be used. Also, in fact, the in-between function has always been there but was lacking a name, and is the main reason for this patch: dsa_tree_notify. Refactor dsa_broadcast to use it. This patch also moves dsa_broadcast (a top-level function) to dsa2.c, where it really belonged in the first place, but had no companion so it stood with dsa_port_notify. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:04 +03:00
int dsa_tree_notify(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst, unsigned long e, void *v);
int dsa_broadcast(unsigned long e, void *v);
net: dsa: allow changing the tag protocol via the "tagging" device attribute Currently DSA exposes the following sysfs: $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot which is a read-only device attribute, introduced in the kernel as commit 98cdb4807123 ("net: dsa: Expose tagging protocol to user-space"), and used by libpcap since its commit 993db3800d7d ("Add support for DSA link-layer types"). It would be nice if we could extend this device attribute by making it writable: $ echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging This is useful with DSA switches that can make use of more than one tagging protocol. It may be useful in dsa_loop in the future too, to perform offline testing of various taggers, or for changing between dsa and edsa on Marvell switches, if that is desirable. In terms of implementation, drivers can support this feature by implementing .change_tag_protocol, which should always leave the switch in a consistent state: either with the new protocol if things went well, or with the old one if something failed. Teardown of the old protocol, if necessary, must be handled by the driver. Some things remain as before: - The .get_tag_protocol is currently only called at probe time, to load the initial tagging protocol driver. Nonetheless, new drivers should report the tagging protocol in current use now. - The driver should manage by itself the initial setup of tagging protocol, no later than the .setup() method, as well as destroying resources used by the last tagger in use, no earlier than the .teardown() method. For multi-switch DSA trees, error handling is a bit more complicated, since e.g. the 5th out of 7 switches may fail to change the tag protocol. When that happens, a revert to the original tag protocol is attempted, but that may fail too, leaving the tree in an inconsistent state despite each individual switch implementing .change_tag_protocol transactionally. Since the intersection between drivers that implement .change_tag_protocol and drivers that support D in DSA is currently the empty set, the possibility for this error to happen is ignored for now. Testing: $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 79.549784] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Adding to iommu group 14 [ 79.565712] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Failed to register DSA switch: -517 $ insmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko $ insmod mscc_felix.ko [ 97.261724] libphy: VSC9959 internal MDIO bus: probed [ 97.267363] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 0 [ 97.274998] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 1 [ 97.282561] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 2 [ 97.289700] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Found PCS at internal MDIO address 3 [ 97.599163] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:10] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.862034] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:11] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 97.950731] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp0: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 97.964278] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp0 [ 98.146161] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp2 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:12] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.238649] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp1: configuring for inband/qsgmii link mode [ 98.251845] 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device swp1 [ 98.433916] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5 swp3 (uninitialized): PHY [0000:00:00.3:13] driver [Microsemi GE VSC8514 SyncE] (irq=POLL) [ 98.485542] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: configuring for fixed/internal link mode [ 98.503584] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Up - 2.5Gbps/Full - flow control rx/tx [ 98.527948] device eno2 entered promiscuous mode [ 98.544755] DSA: tree 0 setup $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=2.337 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.754 ms ^C - 10.0.0.1 ping statistics - 2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.754/1.545/2.337 ms $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot $ cat ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh #!/bin/bash ip link set swp0 down ip link set swp1 down ip link set swp2 down ip link set swp3 down ip link set swp5 down ip link set eno2 down echo ocelot-8021q > /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ip link set eno2 up ip link set swp0 up ip link set swp1 up ip link set swp2 up ip link set swp3 up ip link set swp5 up $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh: line 9: echo: write error: Protocol not available $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot': Resource temporarily unavailable $ insmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko $ ./test_ocelot_8021q.sh $ cat /sys/class/net/eno2/dsa/tagging ocelot-8021q $ rmmod tag_ocelot.ko $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko rmmod: can't unload module 'tag_ocelot_8021q': Resource temporarily unavailable $ ping 10.0.0.1 PING 10.0.0.1 (10.0.0.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=0 ttl=64 time=0.953 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=1 ttl=64 time=0.787 ms 64 bytes from 10.0.0.1: seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.771 ms $ rmmod mscc_felix.ko [ 645.544426] mscc_felix 0000:00:00.5: Link is Down [ 645.838608] DSA: tree 0 torn down $ rmmod tag_ocelot_8021q.ko Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-29 04:00:06 +03:00
int dsa_tree_change_tag_proto(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst,
const struct dsa_device_ops *tag_ops,
const struct dsa_device_ops *old_tag_ops);
net: dsa: provide switch operations for tracking the master state Certain drivers may need to send management traffic to the switch for things like register access, FDB dump, etc, to accelerate what their slow bus (SPI, I2C, MDIO) can already do. Ethernet is faster (especially in bulk transactions) but is also more unreliable, since the user may decide to bring the DSA master down (or not bring it up), therefore severing the link between the host and the attached switch. Drivers needing Ethernet-based register access already should have fallback logic to the slow bus if the Ethernet method fails, but that fallback may be based on a timeout, and the I/O to the switch may slow down to a halt if the master is down, because every Ethernet packet will have to time out. The driver also doesn't have the option to turn off Ethernet-based I/O momentarily, because it wouldn't know when to turn it back on. Which is where this change comes in. By tracking NETDEV_CHANGE, NETDEV_UP and NETDEV_GOING_DOWN events on the DSA master, we should know the exact interval of time during which this interface is reliably available for traffic. Provide this information to switches so they can use it as they wish. An helper is added dsa_port_master_is_operational() to check if a master port is operational. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: Ansuel Smith <ansuelsmth@gmail.com> Reviewed-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2022-02-02 03:03:20 +03:00
void dsa_tree_master_admin_state_change(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst,
struct net_device *master,
bool up);
void dsa_tree_master_oper_state_change(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst,
struct net_device *master,
bool up);
net: dsa: make dp->bridge_num one-based I have seen too many bugs already due to the fact that we must encode an invalid dp->bridge_num as a negative value, because the natural tendency is to check that invalid value using (!dp->bridge_num). Latest example can be seen in commit 1bec0f05062c ("net: dsa: fix bridge_num not getting cleared after ports leaving the bridge"). Convert the existing users to assume that dp->bridge_num == 0 is the encoding for invalid, and valid bridge numbers start from 1. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:47 +03:00
unsigned int dsa_bridge_num_get(const struct net_device *bridge_dev, int max);
void dsa_bridge_num_put(const struct net_device *bridge_dev,
unsigned int bridge_num);
net: dsa: keep the bridge_dev and bridge_num as part of the same structure The main desire behind this is to provide coherent bridge information to the fast path without locking. For example, right now we set dp->bridge_dev and dp->bridge_num from separate code paths, it is theoretically possible for a packet transmission to read these two port properties consecutively and find a bridge number which does not correspond with the bridge device. Another desire is to start passing more complex bridge information to dsa_switch_ops functions. For example, with FDB isolation, it is expected that drivers will need to be passed the bridge which requested an FDB/MDB entry to be offloaded, and along with that bridge_dev, the associated bridge_num should be passed too, in case the driver might want to implement an isolation scheme based on that number. We already pass the {bridge_dev, bridge_num} pair to the TX forwarding offload switch API, however we'd like to remove that and squash it into the basic bridge join/leave API. So that means we need to pass this pair to the bridge join/leave API. During dsa_port_bridge_leave, first we unset dp->bridge_dev, then we call the driver's .port_bridge_leave with what used to be our dp->bridge_dev, but provided as an argument. When bridge_dev and bridge_num get folded into a single structure, we need to preserve this behavior in dsa_port_bridge_leave: we need a copy of what used to be in dp->bridge. Switch drivers check bridge membership by comparing dp->bridge_dev with the provided bridge_dev, but now, if we provide the struct dsa_bridge as a pointer, they cannot keep comparing dp->bridge to the provided pointer, since this only points to an on-stack copy. To make this obvious and prevent driver writers from forgetting and doing stupid things, in this new API, the struct dsa_bridge is provided as a full structure (not very large, contains an int and a pointer) instead of a pointer. An explicit comparison function needs to be used to determine bridge membership: dsa_port_offloads_bridge(). Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Reviewed-by: Alvin Šipraga <alsi@bang-olufsen.dk> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-12-06 19:57:56 +03:00
struct dsa_bridge *dsa_tree_bridge_find(struct dsa_switch_tree *dst,
const struct net_device *br);
net: dsa: Link aggregation support Monitor the following events and notify the driver when: - A DSA port joins/leaves a LAG. - A LAG, made up of DSA ports, joins/leaves a bridge. - A DSA port in a LAG is enabled/disabled (enabled meaning "distributing" in 802.3ad LACP terms). When a LAG joins a bridge, the DSA subsystem will treat that as each individual port joining the bridge. The driver may look at the port's LAG device pointer to see if it is associated with any LAG, if that is required. This is analogue to how switchdev events are replicated out to all lower devices when reaching e.g. a LAG. Drivers can optionally request that DSA maintain a linear mapping from a LAG ID to the corresponding netdev by setting ds->num_lag_ids to the desired size. In the event that the hardware is not capable of offloading a particular LAG for any reason (the typical case being use of exotic modes like broadcast), DSA will take a hands-off approach, allowing the LAG to be formed as a pure software construct. This is reported back through the extended ACK, but is otherwise transparent to the user. Signed-off-by: Tobias Waldekranz <tobias@waldekranz.com> Reviewed-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Tested-by: Vladimir Oltean <olteanv@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Jakub Kicinski <kuba@kernel.org>
2021-01-13 11:42:53 +03:00
net: dsa: tag_8021q: manage RX VLANs dynamically at bridge join/leave time There has been at least one wasted opportunity for tag_8021q to be used by a driver: https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/netdev/patch/20200710113611.3398-3-kurt@linutronix.de/#2484272 because of a design decision: the declared purpose of tag_8021q is to offer source port/switch identification for a tagging driver for packets coming from a switch with no hardware DSA tagging support. It is not intended to provide VLAN-based port isolation, because its first user, sja1105, had another mechanism for bridging domain isolation, the L2 Forwarding Table. So even if 2 ports are in the same VLAN but they are separated via the L2 Forwarding Table, they will not communicate with one another. The L2 Forwarding Table is managed by the sja1105_bridge_join() and sja1105_bridge_leave() methods. As a consequence, today tag_8021q does not bother too much with hooking into .port_bridge_join() and .port_bridge_leave() because that would introduce yet another degree of freedom, it just iterates statically through all ports of a switch and adds the RX VLAN of one port to all the others. In this way, whenever .port_bridge_join() is called, bridging will magically work because the RX VLANs are already installed everywhere they need to be. This is not to say that the reason for the change in this patch is to satisfy the hellcreek and similar use cases, that is merely a nice side effect. Instead it is to make sja1105 cross-chip links work properly over a DSA link. For context, sja1105 today supports a degenerate form of cross-chip bridging, where the switches are interconnected through their CPU ports ("disjoint trees" topology). There is some code which has been generalized into dsa_8021q_crosschip_link_{add,del}, but it is not enough, and frankly it is impossible to build upon that. Real multi-switch DSA trees, like daisy chains or H trees, which have actual DSA links, do not work. The problem is that sja1105 is unlike mv88e6xxx, and does not have a PVT for cross-chip bridging, which is a table by which the local switch can select the forwarding domain for packets from a certain ingress switch ID and source port. The sja1105 switches cannot parse their own DSA tags, because, well, they don't really have support for DSA tags, it's all VLANs. So to make something like cross-chip bridging between sw0p0 and sw1p0 to work over the sw0p3/sw1p3 DSA link to work with sja1105 in the topology below: | | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw1p3 sw1p2 sw1p1 sw1p0 [ user ] [ user ] [ cpu ] [ dsa ] ---- [ dsa ] [ cpu ] [ user ] [ user ] we need to ask ourselves 2 questions: (1) how should the L2 Forwarding Table be managed? (2) how should the VLAN Lookup Table be managed? i.e. what should prevent packets from going to unwanted ports? Since as mentioned, there is no PVT, the L2 Forwarding Table only contains forwarding rules for local ports. So we can say "all user ports are allowed to forward to all CPU ports and all DSA links". If we allow forwarding to DSA links unconditionally, this means we must prevent forwarding using the VLAN Lookup Table. This is in fact asymmetric with what we do for tag_8021q on ports local to the same switch, and it matters because now that we are making tag_8021q a core DSA feature, we need to hook into .crosschip_bridge_join() to add/remove the tag_8021q VLANs. So for symmetry it makes sense to manage the VLANs for local forwarding in the same way as cross-chip forwarding. Note that there is a very precise reason why tag_8021q hooks into dsa_switch_bridge_join() which acts at the cross-chip notifier level, and not at a higher level such as dsa_port_bridge_join(). We need to install the RX VLAN of the newly joining port into the VLAN table of all the existing ports across the tree that are part of the same bridge, and the notifier already does the iteration through the switches for us. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:51 +03:00
/* tag_8021q.c */
net: dsa: tag_8021q: add proper cross-chip notifier support The big problem which mandates cross-chip notifiers for tag_8021q is this: | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw0p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ cpu ] | +---------+ | sw1p0 sw1p1 sw1p2 sw1p3 sw1p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] | +---------+ | sw2p0 sw2p1 sw2p2 sw2p3 sw2p4 [ user ] [ user ] [ user ] [ dsa ] [ dsa ] When the user runs: ip link add br0 type bridge ip link set sw0p0 master br0 ip link set sw2p0 master br0 It doesn't work. This is because dsa_8021q_crosschip_bridge_join() assumes that "ds" and "other_ds" are at most 1 hop away from each other, so it is sufficient to add the RX VLAN of {ds, port} into {other_ds, other_port} and vice versa and presto, the cross-chip link works. When there is another switch in the middle, such as in this case switch 1 with its DSA links sw1p3 and sw1p4, somebody needs to tell it about these VLANs too. Which is exactly why the problem is quadratic: when a port joins a bridge, for each port in the tree that's already in that same bridge we notify a tag_8021q VLAN addition of that port's RX VLAN to the entire tree. It is a very complicated web of VLANs. It must be mentioned that currently we install tag_8021q VLANs on too many ports (DSA links - to be precise, on all of them). For example, when sw2p0 joins br0, and assuming sw1p0 was part of br0 too, we add the RX VLAN of sw2p0 on the DSA links of switch 0 too, even though there isn't any port of switch 0 that is a member of br0 (at least yet). In theory we could notify only the switches which sit in between the port joining the bridge and the port reacting to that bridge_join event. But in practice that is impossible, because of the way 'link' properties are described in the device tree. The DSA bindings require DT writers to list out not only the real/physical DSA links, but in fact the entire routing table, like for example switch 0 above will have: sw0p3: port@3 { link = <&sw1p4 &sw2p4>; }; This was done because: /* TODO: ideally DSA ports would have a single dp->link_dp member, * and no dst->rtable nor this struct dsa_link would be needed, * but this would require some more complex tree walking, * so keep it stupid at the moment and list them all. */ but it is a perfect example of a situation where too much information is actively detrimential, because we are now in the position where we cannot distinguish a real DSA link from one that is put there to avoid the 'complex tree walking'. And because DT is ABI, there is not much we can change. And because we do not know which DSA links are real and which ones aren't, we can't really know if DSA switch A is in the data path between switches B and C, in the general case. So this is why tag_8021q RX VLANs are added on all DSA links, and probably why it will never change. On the other hand, at least the number of additions/deletions is well balanced, and this means that once we implement reference counting at the cross-chip notifier level a la fdb/mdb, there is absolutely zero need for a struct dsa_8021q_crosschip_link, it's all self-managing. In fact, with the tag_8021q notifiers emitted from the bridge join notifiers, it becomes so generic that sja1105 does not need to do anything anymore, we can just delete its implementation of the .crosschip_bridge_{join,leave} methods. Among other things we can simply delete is the home-grown implementation of sja1105_notify_crosschip_switches(). The reason why that is wrong is because it is not quadratic - it only covers remote switches to which we have a cross-chip bridging link and that does not cover in-between switches. This deletion is part of the same patch because sja1105 used to poke deep inside the guts of the tag_8021q context in order to do that. Because the cross-chip links went away, so needs the sja1105 code. Last but not least, dsa_8021q_setup_port() is simplified (and also renamed). Because our TAG_8021Q_VLAN_ADD notifier is designed to react on the CPU port too, the four dsa_8021q_vid_apply() calls: - 1 for RX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's RX VLAN on the CPU port - 1 for TX VLAN on user port - 1 for the user port's TX VLAN on the CPU port now get squashed into only 2 notifier calls via dsa_port_tag_8021q_vlan_add. And because the notifiers to add and to delete a tag_8021q VLAN are distinct, now we finally break up the port setup and teardown into separate functions instead of relying on a "bool enabled" flag which tells us what to do. Arguably it should have been this way from the get go. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:52 +03:00
int dsa_switch_tag_8021q_vlan_add(struct dsa_switch *ds,
struct dsa_notifier_tag_8021q_vlan_info *info);
int dsa_switch_tag_8021q_vlan_del(struct dsa_switch *ds,
struct dsa_notifier_tag_8021q_vlan_info *info);
net: dsa: tag_8021q: manage RX VLANs dynamically at bridge join/leave time There has been at least one wasted opportunity for tag_8021q to be used by a driver: https://patchwork.ozlabs.org/project/netdev/patch/20200710113611.3398-3-kurt@linutronix.de/#2484272 because of a design decision: the declared purpose of tag_8021q is to offer source port/switch identification for a tagging driver for packets coming from a switch with no hardware DSA tagging support. It is not intended to provide VLAN-based port isolation, because its first user, sja1105, had another mechanism for bridging domain isolation, the L2 Forwarding Table. So even if 2 ports are in the same VLAN but they are separated via the L2 Forwarding Table, they will not communicate with one another. The L2 Forwarding Table is managed by the sja1105_bridge_join() and sja1105_bridge_leave() methods. As a consequence, today tag_8021q does not bother too much with hooking into .port_bridge_join() and .port_bridge_leave() because that would introduce yet another degree of freedom, it just iterates statically through all ports of a switch and adds the RX VLAN of one port to all the others. In this way, whenever .port_bridge_join() is called, bridging will magically work because the RX VLANs are already installed everywhere they need to be. This is not to say that the reason for the change in this patch is to satisfy the hellcreek and similar use cases, that is merely a nice side effect. Instead it is to make sja1105 cross-chip links work properly over a DSA link. For context, sja1105 today supports a degenerate form of cross-chip bridging, where the switches are interconnected through their CPU ports ("disjoint trees" topology). There is some code which has been generalized into dsa_8021q_crosschip_link_{add,del}, but it is not enough, and frankly it is impossible to build upon that. Real multi-switch DSA trees, like daisy chains or H trees, which have actual DSA links, do not work. The problem is that sja1105 is unlike mv88e6xxx, and does not have a PVT for cross-chip bridging, which is a table by which the local switch can select the forwarding domain for packets from a certain ingress switch ID and source port. The sja1105 switches cannot parse their own DSA tags, because, well, they don't really have support for DSA tags, it's all VLANs. So to make something like cross-chip bridging between sw0p0 and sw1p0 to work over the sw0p3/sw1p3 DSA link to work with sja1105 in the topology below: | | sw0p0 sw0p1 sw0p2 sw0p3 sw1p3 sw1p2 sw1p1 sw1p0 [ user ] [ user ] [ cpu ] [ dsa ] ---- [ dsa ] [ cpu ] [ user ] [ user ] we need to ask ourselves 2 questions: (1) how should the L2 Forwarding Table be managed? (2) how should the VLAN Lookup Table be managed? i.e. what should prevent packets from going to unwanted ports? Since as mentioned, there is no PVT, the L2 Forwarding Table only contains forwarding rules for local ports. So we can say "all user ports are allowed to forward to all CPU ports and all DSA links". If we allow forwarding to DSA links unconditionally, this means we must prevent forwarding using the VLAN Lookup Table. This is in fact asymmetric with what we do for tag_8021q on ports local to the same switch, and it matters because now that we are making tag_8021q a core DSA feature, we need to hook into .crosschip_bridge_join() to add/remove the tag_8021q VLANs. So for symmetry it makes sense to manage the VLANs for local forwarding in the same way as cross-chip forwarding. Note that there is a very precise reason why tag_8021q hooks into dsa_switch_bridge_join() which acts at the cross-chip notifier level, and not at a higher level such as dsa_port_bridge_join(). We need to install the RX VLAN of the newly joining port into the VLAN table of all the existing ports across the tree that are part of the same bridge, and the notifier already does the iteration through the switches for us. Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2021-07-19 20:14:51 +03:00
net: dsa: implement auto-normalization of MTU for bridge hardware datapath Many switches don't have an explicit knob for configuring the MTU (maximum transmission unit per interface). Instead, they do the length-based packet admission checks on the ingress interface, for reasons that are easy to understand (why would you accept a packet in the queuing subsystem if you know you're going to drop it anyway). So it is actually the MRU that these switches permit configuring. In Linux there only exists the IFLA_MTU netlink attribute and the associated dev_set_mtu function. The comments like to play blind and say that it's changing the "maximum transfer unit", which is to say that there isn't any directionality in the meaning of the MTU word. So that is the interpretation that this patch is giving to things: MTU == MRU. When 2 interfaces having different MTUs are bridged, the bridge driver MTU auto-adjustment logic kicks in: what br_mtu_auto_adjust() does is it adjusts the MTU of the bridge net device itself (and not that of the slave net devices) to the minimum value of all slave interfaces, in order for forwarded packets to not exceed the MTU regardless of the interface they are received and send on. The idea behind this behavior, and why the slave MTUs are not adjusted, is that normal termination from Linux over the L2 forwarding domain should happen over the bridge net device, which _is_ properly limited by the minimum MTU. And termination over individual slave devices is possible even if those are bridged. But that is not "forwarding", so there's no reason to do normalization there, since only a single interface sees that packet. The problem with those switches that can only control the MRU is with the offloaded data path, where a packet received on an interface with MRU 9000 would still be forwarded to an interface with MRU 1500. And the br_mtu_auto_adjust() function does not really help, since the MTU configured on the bridge net device is ignored. In order to enforce the de-facto MTU == MRU rule for these switches, we need to do MTU normalization, which means: in order for no packet larger than the MTU configured on this port to be sent, then we need to limit the MRU on all ports that this packet could possibly come from. AKA since we are configuring the MRU via MTU, it means that all ports within a bridge forwarding domain should have the same MTU. And that is exactly what this patch is trying to do. >From an implementation perspective, we try to follow the intent of the user, otherwise there is a risk that we might livelock them (they try to change the MTU on an already-bridged interface, but we just keep changing it back in an attempt to keep the MTU normalized). So the MTU that the bridge is normalized to is either: - The most recently changed one: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 ip link set dev swp0 mtu 1400 This sequence will make swp1 inherit MTU 1400 from swp0. - The one of the most recently added interface to the bridge: ip link set dev swp0 master br0 ip link set dev swp1 mtu 1400 ip link set dev swp1 master br0 The above sequence will make swp0 inherit MTU 1400 as well. Suggested-by: Florian Fainelli <f.fainelli@gmail.com> Signed-off-by: Vladimir Oltean <vladimir.oltean@nxp.com> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2020-03-27 22:55:43 +03:00
extern struct list_head dsa_tree_list;
net: Distributed Switch Architecture protocol support Distributed Switch Architecture is a protocol for managing hardware switch chips. It consists of a set of MII management registers and commands to configure the switch, and an ethernet header format to signal which of the ports of the switch a packet was received from or is intended to be sent to. The switches that this driver supports are typically embedded in access points and routers, and a typical setup with a DSA switch looks something like this: +-----------+ +-----------+ | | RGMII | | | +-------+ +------ 1000baseT MDI ("WAN") | | | 6-port +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN1") | CPU | | ethernet +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN2") | |MIImgmt| switch +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN3") | +-------+ w/5 PHYs +------ 1000baseT MDI ("LAN4") | | | | +-----------+ +-----------+ The switch driver presents each port on the switch as a separate network interface to Linux, polls the switch to maintain software link state of those ports, forwards MII management interface accesses to those network interfaces (e.g. as done by ethtool) to the switch, and exposes the switch's hardware statistics counters via the appropriate Linux kernel interfaces. This initial patch supports the MII management interface register layout of the Marvell 88E6123, 88E6161 and 88E6165 switch chips, and supports the "Ethertype DSA" packet tagging format. (There is no officially registered ethertype for the Ethertype DSA packet format, so we just grab a random one. The ethertype to use is programmed into the switch, and the switch driver uses the value of ETH_P_EDSA for this, so this define can be changed at any time in the future if the one we chose is allocated to another protocol or if Ethertype DSA gets its own officially registered ethertype, and everything will continue to work.) Signed-off-by: Lennert Buytenhek <buytenh@marvell.com> Tested-by: Nicolas Pitre <nico@marvell.com> Tested-by: Byron Bradley <byron.bbradley@gmail.com> Tested-by: Tim Ellis <tim.ellis@mac.com> Tested-by: Peter van Valderen <linux@ddcrew.com> Tested-by: Dirk Teurlings <dirk@upexia.nl> Signed-off-by: David S. Miller <davem@davemloft.net>
2008-10-07 17:44:02 +04:00
#endif